JP2004146052A - Recording and play-back device - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To realize a recording and play-back device having a data recording function without practically increasing the number of components and costs by solving the problem of the absence of the data recording function when recording and playing back a ROM disk with a recording and play-back device using an optical recording medium or when a RAM disk is played back by a recording and play-back device exclusively for optical play-back. <P>SOLUTION: Magnetic recording and play-back independent of optical recording is performed by providing a magnetic recording layer 3 as an upper layer of an optical recording layer 4 of a recording medium 2 and providing a magnetic head 8 on the side opposed to an optical head 6 to perform recording or playing-back. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2004,JPO

Description

The present invention relates to a recording / reproducing apparatus for recording or reproducing information on a recording medium.

In recent years, the application of optical discs in various fields is expanding. Optical discs are classified into recordable RAM discs and non-recordable ROM discs. RAM discs are five to ten times more expensive to manufacture than ROM discs. Therefore, ROM disks are mainly used for applications that distribute a large amount of information to a large number of people, for example, applications that require low media costs, such as electronic publishing applications and applications that supply music software and video software. However, as the application to interactive uses is widespread, as seen in CDROM game machines and CDROM built-in personal computers, ROM disks are also required to have RAM functions. Since there are few applications that require a large RAM capacity for consumer use, the emergence of a new concept of media that realizes three conditions of small capacity RAM function, large capacity ROM function, and low cost in interactive use for consumer use is awaited. Was. Recently, illegally copied versions of ROM disks such as CDs have been circulating, causing serious damage to copyright holders. There is also a need for a copy protection method for CDs and the like. In addition, a software distribution method in which a plurality of encrypted programs are put on a disk and unlocked by a password is becoming widespread, and it is required to record a different ID number for each ROM in order to increase the security of the password.

One method of realizing this concept is to provide a single magnetic recording layer on the back surface of the ROM disk. In this case, the process of forming the recording layer can be performed at one tenth or less of the cost of the ROM disk, so that the partial RAM disk can be realized without increasing the cost of the ROM disk. As one method, for a ROM disk such as a CDROM without a cartridge, as disclosed in Patent Documents 1 to 4, a method of providing an optical recording unit on the front surface of a CDROM and a magnetic recording unit on the back surface has already been proposed. I have. Further, as shown in Patent Document 5, an optical recording section made of a non-magnetic material is provided on the front surface, such as an optical disk using an amosphasic material, and a disk having a magnetic recording layer on the back side is used. It is disclosed that a magnetic head is provided for magnetic recording.

In addition, the method of preventing duplication uses the point that the disk cannot be manufactured without special manufacturing equipment by intentionally scratching or watermarking the disk or making a special disk by a special process. Only the duplication preventing means described above was disclosed.
JP-A-56-163536 JP-A-57-6446 JP-A-57-212642 JP-A-2-179951 JP-A-60-70543

However, these methods do not disclose any requirements necessary for concrete realization by simply combining a magnetic recording section and an optical recording section. For example, methods for preventing mutual interference between the optical recording unit and magnetic recording unit, methods for accessing magnetic tracks with a simple configuration, methods for sharing circuits, and magnetic characteristics for media used without cartridges, which are important when realizing equipment. It does not disclose a method for protecting recorded information from an external environment such as magnetism or wear, a method for compressing information to be recorded in a RAM area, a method for speeding up access, and a specific physical format of a track.

In addition, the method of mass-producing media that is important for realizing the media at low cost, the method of matching the media to the CD standard, and the like, that is, the method for specifically realizing a consumer partial RAM disk are almost completely impossible. It was not disclosed in the prior art. Therefore, the method disclosed in the related art has a serious problem that it is difficult to practically use a medium and a system that can be used for consumer use.

(4) An object of the present invention is to provide a recording / reproducing apparatus and a medium in which a ROM disk type partial RAM disk and a system used without a cartridge such as a CD-ROM are specifically realized for the above items.

Next, with regard to the unauthorized duplication prevention method, the second aspect of the present invention is to realize a duplication prevention disk and device by a method such as changing the physical arrangement of addresses without using a special method as conventionally proposed. Aim.

In order to achieve this object, the recording / reproducing apparatus of the present invention forms an image from a light source on a recording medium comprising a transparent substrate and an optical recording layer by an optical head from the transparent substrate side to the optical recording layer, thereby recording a signal. Alternatively, a recording / reproducing apparatus for performing reproduction includes a position detecting means for detecting a position or a pit depth of address information recorded on the medium, a decrypting means for encryption, and a collating unit.

With this configuration, an illegally duplicated disk can be detected by collating the physical location information of the medium with the physical location information recorded on the recording medium by the location detection unit using the collation unit.

By providing the magnetic recording layer 3 on the back side of the recording medium 2 having an optical recording surface, in the case of a RAM type recording / reproducing apparatus such as a magneto-optical recording, a magnetic field modulation type magneto-optical recording / reproducing apparatus has a magnetic recording layer. By using the magnetic field head in common, it is possible to magnetically record information of an independent channel provided on the recording medium without increasing the number of parts and cost. In this case, since the slider tracking mechanism for the magnetic head is originally provided, there is almost no increase in cost on the recording / reproducing apparatus side. Therefore, there is an effect that a magnetic recording / reproducing function independent of optical recording can be added at almost the same price.

The recorded recording medium is applied to a music CD, HD, game CDROM or MDROM, and a magnetic recording track provided on the back side is reproduced by a ROM type recording / reproducing apparatus 1 shown in the block diagram of FIG. By doing so, a remarkable effect is obtained, such as being able to return to the state of the previous use during reproduction. Further, even when the recording is limited to only one track in the TOC area as described in the first embodiment, several hundred bits can be recorded when the gap width is 200 μm. This capacity satisfies the requirements required for the use of the current game IC-ROM with a flash memory. In the case of limiting to TOC, the system becomes simple because access means for the magnetic track is not required.

Also, in a read / write device of the read-only type for optical recording, it is necessary to provide a magnetic head portion or the like on the side opposite to the optical head with respect to the recording medium. The price can be reduced by mass production because it can be shared with the head. Originally, the cost is much lower than that of optical recording components for low-density magnetic recording components, so that the price increase is small. There is no additional tracking mechanism to mechanically link the optical head and the magnetic head on the opposite side. Therefore, the cost increase is small.

Although the tracking accuracy of the optical head is not high due to the address information or time information engraved on the optical recording layer on the surface of the RAM type or ROM type recording medium, any position on the disk can be obtained. Tracking control of the magnetic head. This has the effect of eliminating the need to add any expensive components for consumer use such as linear sensors and linear actuators found on floppy disks.

保護 The protective layer on the back surface of the conventional magnetic field modulation type magneto-optical recording medium is manufactured by spin coating from a binder and a lubricant. In the case of the present invention, a magnetic material is simply added to this material in the same step and spin coating is performed, and the number of manufacturing steps is not often increased. This increase in cost is negligible in terms of overall cost. Therefore, a new value of a magnetic recording function is added with almost no increase in cost.

As described above, in the present invention, a magnetic channel can be added with almost no increase in cost, so that a RAM function can be added to a conventional ROM-type optical disk or a ROM-only player.

According to the present invention, a consumer partial RAM disk is specifically realized with respect to a ROM disk without a cartridge such as a CDROM and a ROM disk with a cartridge such as an MDROM.

In the case of a ROM disk without a cartridge, the conventional system in which a magnetic recording layer is simply provided on the back surface cannot be used for consumer use as described above. In the case of consumer use, the usage environment is diverse. At home, it is affected by magnets, dirt, scratches, and the like. Under worst-case conditions, if the magnetic recording layer is exposed like a floppy disk, the recorded information is easily destroyed. In the present invention, the Hc of the medium is increased to 1200 Oe or more, and measures are taken against the magnetic field of the magnet to ensure reliability. Further, a hard protective layer having a Mohs hardness of 5 or more is provided on the magnetic recording layer to prevent scratches such as nails. The use of a water-repellent material for the protective layer in the media and a method of providing a cleaning mechanism in the system are taking measures against contamination.

と If you use such media, you need to adapt the system configuration and functions to this special media. Generally, a magnetic disk such as a floppy disk or a hard disk causes a space loss on the order of several hundred angstroms. On the other hand, in the present invention, since the protective film or the printing layer is located above the magnetic recording layer, the space loss is 1 μm or more, which is an order of magnitude larger than that of the magnetic recording of a normal magnetic disk. In order to record this, the present invention employs a configuration in which the head gap of the magnetic head is enlarged to 5 μm or more. As a result, there is an effect that the medium of the present invention having high environmental resistance can be reproduced. Also, in order to reduce the cost, in the case of a CD on an optical track, an optical head is accessed to a specific optical track by using address information called a subcode recorded in 75 seconds per second, and linked with the optical head. A specific magnetic track is tracked by a moving magnetic head. In this case, the magnetic head and the optical head can be moved by using one actuator. This has the effect of significantly reducing costs.

(4) Since the magnetic noise that jumps into the magnetic head from the actuator section of the optical head is 40 dB or more, shielding the optical head or separating the magnetic head from the optical head has the effect of reducing the level of mixed noise. Further, since a liquid lubricating layer cannot be provided on the medium, abrasion by the magnetic head is severe. For this reason, the information of the magnetic recording layer is temporarily stored in the internal memory, and the contents of the internal memory are rewritten during information processing to reduce the number of times of recording and reproduction of the magnetic head. The actual number of passes of the magnetic head is reduced by separating from the disk surface. Therefore, there is an effect that the life of the medium and the head is significantly extended. Also, a "variable track pitch mode" is provided in order to speed up the rise when the disc is inserted. This forms a magnetic track in that order just behind the optical track in the order of the optical tracks accessed by the optical head at the time of rising. Then, at the time of rising, the optical tracks access these magnetic tracks in order, and the magnetic head also automatically accesses. If the magnetic recording data required at the time of rising is recorded on these magnetic tracks, the information of the magnetic track required at the time of rising can be reproduced without extra access to the magnetic tracks. This has the effect of eliminating the lost time and speeding up the rise. Also, when there is magnetic track information for each song, there is also an effect that access to personal data for each song at the time of, for example, karaoke becomes faster. In addition, unlike a normal floppy disk, it is not necessary to provide a head portion of data of each track on a specific angle, and a synchronization area can be arranged at random. Therefore, rotation angle detection is not required and the cost of the device is reduced.

In addition, in a disk with a cartridge such as an MDROM, a magnetic material having a low Hc, which is commonly used for a floppy disk, can be used for a magnetic recording layer, and there is no increase in space loss due to a protective layer. However, since it is not originally considered to attach a liner to the cartridge, if the liner is provided, the torque of the drive motor until now is weak due to the generation of friction torque, and the cartridge does not rotate normally. For this reason, the present invention employs a configuration in which the liner is temporarily brought into contact with the media surface only during magnetic recording. This partial liner method has an effect that the influence of dust is prevented. In addition, the configuration in which the magneto-optical field modulation head is shared with the magnetic head has the effect of reducing the number of components.

As described above, according to the present invention, a medium having a magnetic recording unit on the back side of an optical recording surface and a recording / reproducing apparatus can be used in a consumer environment while ensuring reliability in a consumer environment. It can be realized at cost.

(Example 1)
Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

FIG. 1 shows a block diagram of a recording / reproducing apparatus according to the present invention. The recording / reproducing apparatus 1 has a recording medium 2 including a magnetic recording layer 3, an optical recording layer 4 for optical recording, and a light transmitting layer 5 therein.

At the time of magneto-optical reproduction, light from the light emitting section is converged on the optical recording layer 4 by the optical head 6 and the optical recording block 7 to reproduce a magneto-optically recorded signal. At the time of optical recording, the laser light is converged on a specific portion of the optical recording layer 4 by the optical head 6 and the optical recording block 7, and the temperature is raised to a Curie temperature or higher. In this state, the magnetic head 8 and the magnetic recording block 9 modulate the applied magnetic field in this portion to perform conventional magneto-optical recording.

At the time of magnetic recording, a magnetic signal is recorded on the magnetic recording layer 3 using the magnetic head 8 and the magnetic recording block 9. The system control unit 10 obtains operation information and output information from each circuit, drives the drive block 11, and controls the motor 12, the tracking of the optical head 6, and the focus.

Next, the detailed operation will be described. When recording an external input signal, a recording command is transmitted from the keyboard 15 or the external interface unit 14 to the system control unit 10 when the external input signal is received or when an operator operates a key. The system control unit 10 sends an input command to the input unit 12 and sends an optical recording command to the optical recording block 7. An external input, for example, an audio or video signal is input to the input unit 12 and becomes a digital signal such as PCM. This signal is sent to the input section 32 of the optical recording block 7, subjected to error correction encoding by the ECC encoder 35, and transmitted via the optical circuit 37 to the magnetic recording circuit 29 and the magnetic head circuit 31 in the magnetic recording block 9. The recording magnetic field corresponding to the optical recording signal is applied to the magneto-optical material within a specific range of the optical recording layer 4 sent to the magnetic head 8 via the optical recording layer 4. The recording material in a narrower area of the recording layer 4 is heated to a temperature higher than the Curie temperature by the laser beam from the optical head 6, and the magnetization reversal occurs in this portion by the applied magnetic field. Accordingly, as the recording medium 2 rotates, the magnetization 52 indicated by the arrow is formed on the optical recording layer 4 as the recording medium 2 travels in the direction indicated by the arrow 51 as shown in the enlarged view of the optical recording head section in FIG. It is recorded one after another as shown in the figure.

At this time, the system control unit 10 obtains the tracking information, address information, and clock information recorded on the optical recording layer 4 from the optical head circuit 39 and the optical reproduction circuit 38, and sends control information to the drive block 11 based on the information. give. More specifically, the system control unit 10 controls the rotation speed of the motor 17 to a motor drive circuit 26 so that the relative speed between the optical head 6 and the recording medium 2 becomes a predetermined linear speed.

(4) The optical head drive circuit 25 and the optical head actuator 18 control the light beam to scan on a target track, and also control the focus so that the optical recording layer 4 is focused. When accessing another track, the head base 19 is moved by the actuator 23 and the head moving circuit 24, and the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 on the head base 19 are moved in conjunction with each other. Therefore, both heads reach the desired front and back tracks at the same radial position. The head lifting / lowering unit 20 is driven by a magnetic head lifting / lowering circuit 22 and a lifting / lowering motor 21, and the magnetic head 8 and the slider 41 are driven by the magnetic head 8 on the disk surface of the recording medium 2 during loading of the disk cassette 42 or during a time period when magnetic recording is not performed. It separates from the recording layer 3 and prevents wear of the magnetic head 8. As described above, the system control unit 10 sends control information to the drive block 11 to control the tracking and focusing of the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8, the elevation of the magnetic head 8, the rotation speed of the motor 17, and the like.

Next, a method of reproducing a magneto-optical recording signal will be described. First, using the enlarged view of the optical recording head unit in FIG. 2, the laser beam from the issuing unit 57 travels in the direction shown by the optical path 59 by the polarizing beam splitter 55 and focuses on the optical recording layer 4 of the recording medium 2 by the lens 54. Tie. The focusing tracking control in this case is performed by driving only the lens 54 by the optical head driving unit 18. The magneto-optical material of the optical recording layer is in a magnetized state according to the optical recording signal as shown in FIG. Therefore, the deflection angle of the reflected light shown in the optical path 59a differs depending on the magnetization direction due to the Kerr effect. The polarization angle θ is obtained by splitting the reflected light by the polarization beam splitter 55a, providing light receiving portions 58 and 58a respectively, and taking the difference between the two light receiving signals to detect the magnetization direction, thereby reproducing the optical recording signal. . The operation at the time of reproducing the optical signal is the same as that of the conventional magneto-optical recording, and will not be described in further detail. This reproduced signal is sent from the optical head 6 of FIG. 1 to the optical recording block 7, error-corrected by the ECC decoder 36 via the optical head circuit 39 and the optical reproducing circuit 38, and the original digital signal is reproduced and output. It is sent to the unit 33. The output unit 33 has a memory unit 34 in which recording signals for a certain time are stored. For example, when a compressed audio signal of 250 kbps is stored using a 1 Mbit IC memory, the signal can be stored for about 4 seconds. When used for an audio player, if the tracking of the optical head 6 is lost due to external vibrations, if the optical head 6 recovers within 4 seconds, there is no gap in the audio signal. This scheme is well known. The signal from the output unit 33 is sent to the output unit 13 at the final stage, and in the case of an audio signal, is subjected to PCM demodulation and then output externally as an analog audio signal.

Next, the magnetic recording mode will be described. In FIG. 1, an external input signal or a signal from the system control unit 10 input to the input unit is sent to the input unit 21 of the magnetic circuit block 9, and the ECC encoder 35 in the optical recording block 7 is used. Encoding such as error correction is performed. The encoded signal is sent to the magnetic head by the magnetic recording circuit 29 and the magnetic head circuit 31. 3, a magnetic recording signal sent to the magnetic head 8 is turned into a magnetic field by the coil 40, magnetizes the magnetic material of the magnetic recording layer 3, and forms a magnetic signal 61 in the vertical direction. Is made. The recording medium 2 has a perpendicular magnetization film.

(4) As the magnetic medium 2 travels in the direction of the arrow 51, magnetic signals are sequentially recorded according to the magnetic recording signals as shown in FIG. In this case, the magnetic field is also applied to the magneto-optical recording layer 4. However, since the coercive force of the magneto-optical recording material below the Curie temperature is several thousand to 10,000 Oe, it is magnetized unless raised above the Curie temperature. And is not affected by the magnetic field of the magnetic recording.

However, if the magnetically recorded portion of the magnetic recording layer 3 and the optical recording layer 4 using the magneto-optical recording film are too close to each other, the magnetic field from the above-described magnetic recording portion will cause several tens to It can reach several hundred Oe. For magneto-optical recording under these conditions, when the temperature of the optical recording layer 4 is set to a Curie temperature or higher by a light beam, magnetization reversal occurs due to the magnetic field from the magnetic recording layer 3 and the error rate increases during optical recording. Therefore, the thickness of the interference layer 81 is provided between the magnetic recording layer 3 and the optical recording layer 4 as shown in the sectional view of the recording medium in FIG. Since the protection layers 82 and 82a for preventing deterioration are provided on both sides of the optical recording layer 4, the sum of the thickness of the interference layer 81 and the protection layer 82 is the interference interval L. In this case, assuming that the magnetic recording wavelength is λ, the amount of attenuation is 56.4 × L / λ. Therefore, if λ is set to 0.5 μm, an effect is obtained if L is 0.2 μm or more. Similar effects can be obtained even if the thickness of the protective layer 82 is L or more as shown in FIG. The manufacturing method is described below. A protective layer 82 and an interference layer 81 are provided on the magneto-optical recording layer 4, and a material obtained by mixing a lubricant, a binder, and a magnetic material having perpendicular anisotropy such as barium ferrite is spin-coated. Is applied while applying a vertical magnetic field to the substrate to form the magnetic recording layer 3. As a result, a recording medium 2 suitable for perpendicular magnetic recording as shown in FIG.

The above is the case where the optical recording layer 4 for magneto-optical recording is provided, but the recording / reproducing apparatus 1 of the present invention can also reproduce a ROM disk such as a CD. As shown in the cross-sectional view of the recording medium in FIG. 9, a reflective film 84 made of aluminum or the like is formed on the pit portions of the substrate 5 having the pits formed thereon by sputtering or the like, and a lubricant, a binder, and a magnetic material are formed thereon. The mixed material is applied to the substrate while applying a vertical magnetic field to form a magnetic recording layer 3 having a perpendicular magnetic recording film, whereby the ROM-type recording medium 2 can be obtained. Since this medium has a CD ROM function on the front side and a RAM function on the back side, various effects described later can be obtained. In this case, the cost increases only by adding a magnetic material to the material for forming the protective film by spin coating performed in the current CD. For this reason, the increase in manufacturing cost is only the cost of the magnetic material itself. Since this cost is several tenths of the manufacturing cost of the media, the cost increase is extremely small.

ト ラ ッ キ ン グ Tracking during magnetic recording will be described. As shown in FIG. 1, based on the tracking information reproduced from the optical head 6 and the optical head circuit 39, a movement command is sent from the system control unit 10 to the head moving circuit 24 to drive the actuator 23, and the head base 19 is moved in the tracking direction. Moving. Then, as shown in the enlarged view of the head portion only in the tracking direction in FIG. 4, the optical head 6 focuses on the optical recording layer 4 near a specific optical recording track 65. That is, the optical head driving unit 18 that drives the optical head 6 is mechanically coupled to the magnetic head 8 via the head base 19 and the head elevating unit 20. Therefore, the magnetic head 8 moves in the tracking direction in conjunction with the movement of the optical head. That is, if the optical head 6 is controlled to a specific optical track 66, the magnetic head 8 moves to a specific magnetic track 67 on the back surface of the optical track 66. Guard bands 68, 68a are provided on both sides of this track. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of the magnetic head portion shown in FIG. If the position of the optical head 6 is controlled so as to scan the specific Tn-th optical track 65, the magnetic head 8 runs on the specific Mm-th magnetic track 67 on the back surface.

In this case, only the drive system of the optical head is required, and there is no need to separately provide a tracking control unit for the magnetic head 8. A linear sensor, which was necessary for a magnetic disk drive, is no longer necessary.

Next, the method of accessing the optical track and the magnetic track will be described. The optical head 6 is tracked in conjunction with the magnetic head 8. For this reason, when the optical track information currently being recorded / reproduced from the lower surface is different from the radial position of the magnetic track to be accessed from the upper surface, it is impossible to access both at the same time. In the case of data, only a slow access does not cause a fatal problem, but in the case of a continuous signal such as an audio signal or an image signal, interruption is not allowed. Therefore, magnetic recording cannot be performed during normal-speed optical recording / reproducing. In the present embodiment, a memory unit 34 is provided in the input unit 32 and the output unit 33, and a method of accumulating a signal for several times the maximum access time of magnetic recording is adopted. Therefore, as shown in the timing chart of the magnetic recording in FIG. 6, by increasing the rotation speed of the recording medium 2 at the time of recording / reproducing to n times, the optical recording / reproducing time T becomes 1 / n compared to the normal speed, and T1, It becomes T2. Therefore, the time T0 which is n-1 times the recording / reproducing time from t = t3 to t = t is the margin time. The magnetic track is accessed during the access time Ta between t3 and t4 in a part of the allowance time T0, magnetic recording and reproduction are performed during the recording and reproduction period TR from t4 to t6, and the feedback period from t5 to t6 By accessing and returning to the original optical track or the next optical track again during Tb, the optical recording and the magnetic recording can be accessed in a time-division manner by one head moving unit. In this case, the memory unit 34 is set so as to have a capacity to store a continuous signal during the allowance period To.

The track access of the magnetic head just described will be described with reference to the magnetic recording timing chart of FIG. 6 and the sectional views of the recording section of FIGS. First, after the cassette 42 shown in the perspective view of the cassette in FIG. 15 is inserted into the recording / reproducing apparatus 1 shown in the perspective view of the recording / reproducing apparatus in FIG. 16, first, as shown in FIG. The light beam of the optical head 6 is focused on the optical track 65 in the TOC area where the information is recorded, and the reproduction of the TOC information is performed. At this time, the magnetic head 8 runs on the magnetic track 67 on the back surface, and the magnetic recording information on this track is reproduced. In this way, information on the optical track in the TOC of the recording medium 2 is reproduced at the same time as the first operation, and at the same time, information such as the previous access content recorded on the magnetic track and the status at the time of completion of the previous operation is obtained. This content is displayed on the display unit 16 as shown in FIG.

For example, in the case of acoustic information, the last song number, the elapsed time at the time of interruption, the reserved song number, etc. are automatically recorded in the magnetic recording area at the end of the previous time. Next, when the recording medium 2 is inserted into the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus again, the information at the previous end recorded on the magnetic track 67 is reproduced together with the index information of the optical track 65 as described above, and It is displayed as shown in FIG. FIG. 16 shows a state in which the previous access end time, the operator name, the last music number, the elapsed time at the time of interruption, the music number and music number preset last time are recorded and displayed. Specifically, "Contineu?" Is displayed and asked, and if "Yes" is entered, music playback is resumed from the interrupted point of the song of the same song number at the end of the previous time. If you enter "No", the music will be played in the preset song order. In this way, the operator can automatically reproduce the content that was interrupted last time as it is, or can listen to the music in a desired music order. This is because, as shown in the perspective view of the game machine in FIG. 18, the game CDROM device records and reproduces the previously interrupted game contents, for example, the number of stages, the points acquired, and the number of items reached, so that time elapses after the game is over. Thus, when the user wants to restart the game, the player can restart the game from exactly the same place as the previous game in the same state, which is an effect not obtained by the conventional CDROM type game device.

The above is the case of the simple access method for accessing the magnetic track in the TOC area. In this case, although the memory capacity is small, there is an effect that the cost is the simplest and the cheapest.

(5) Next, a description will be given of a junction for accessing tracks other than the TOC area. FIG. 11 shows a state where the optical head 6 is accessing a specific optical track 65a. At this time, the magnetic head 8 linked with the optical head 6 accesses the magnetic track 67a on the back side of the optical track 65a. If the necessary magnetic recording information is on another magnetic track 67b, which is distant from the magnetic track 67a, it is necessary to move the magnetic head 8 to the magnetic track 67b. In this case, as described in the timing chart of FIG. 6, it is necessary to complete the movement, recording, and return of the head during the allowance period To. In this case, the magnetic track number on the back surface is previously set in the TOC area or the specific area of the optical recording layer 4. And the corresponding optical track NO. Is recorded, this information is read, and a necessary magnetic track number is read. No. corresponding to the optical track NO. Can be calculated. Next, as shown in FIG. 12, the head base 19 is moved during the access time Ta to fix the optical head 6 so as to access the optical track 65b of this optical track number. Then, the magnetic head 8 tracks a predetermined magnetic track 67b. Thus, magnetic recording or reproduction can be performed. In this case, while tracking the optical track 65a as shown in FIG. 13, the magnetic head 8 is raised upward by the elevating motor 21 and separated from the magnetic recording layer, and during the access time Ta, as shown in FIG. Reduce the rotation speed of No. 17. While the rotation speed is decreasing, the magnetic head 8 is lowered to make contact with the magnetic recording layer 3. Thus, the destruction of the magnetic head 8 can be prevented. Magnetic recording is performed by increasing the rotation speed during TR, and the magnetic head 8 is increased by lowering the rotation speed during Tb, and after increasing the rotation speed, the rotation speed is increased again to return to the original optical track 65a as shown in FIG. During this time, optical recording and reproduction are performed. During this spare time T0, the data stored in the memory 34 is reproduced, so that the continuous reading signal such as music is not interrupted. In addition, as shown in FIG. 14, even during access to the TOC area, if there is an instruction in the TOC area that magnetic recording is unnecessary, the magnetic head 8 is not lowered. Thus, even when the recording medium 2 having no magnetic recording layer 3 is inserted, an accident that the magnetic head 8 comes into contact and is broken can be prevented. In this manner, by moving the magnetic head 8 up and down during the period in which the rotation speed is reduced, there is an effect that the destruction and friction of the magnetic head can be greatly reduced. FIG. 15 is a perspective view of a cassette 42 that stores the optical recording medium 2. A shutter 88, a magnetic recording prevention mechanism 89, and an optical recording prevention mechanism 89a are provided, and recording protection can be set separately. Naturally, only cassettes 89a for preventing magnetic recording are provided in the ROM type cassette.

FIG. 17 is a block diagram of a recording / reproducing apparatus for reproducing optical recording. The optical recording block differs from FIG. 1 in that the optical recording circuit and the ECC encoder are omitted. Compared with a reproducing player such as a general CD player, the components of the magnetic head elevating unit 20, the magnetic head 8 and the magnetic recording block 9 are added, but all the components can share the components of the magneto-optical recording and reproducing apparatus of FIG. . In addition, since these costs are much lower than those of optical recording-related components, the cost increase is small. Although the storage capacity is smaller than that of a floppy disk, information can be recorded and reproduced on a ROM-type recording medium at such a low cost. Is born. According to our calculations, in the case of a disk having a diameter of 60 mm, a memory capacity of about 1 KB to 10 KB for magnetic recording can be obtained by using a magnetic head for modulating a magnetic field. The current ROMIC for games is equipped with SRAM 2 KB or 8 KB memory, so it can be said that it has sufficient capacity and replaces ROMIC.

Here, the error correction encoder 35 and the error correction decoder 36 in FIG. 1 will be described in detail.

No error correction is performed on an exchangeable magnetic disk having a normal density, such as a fixed disk or a widely-used 3.5-inch or other 2HD or 2DD floppy disk. For example, in the case of 2HD of a 3.5-inch floppy disk, which is currently the mainstream, 135 TPI is used, and the error rate when recording and reproducing is close to 10 ^-12 . Therefore, when the cartridge is inserted into the cartridge, no oil or scratches on the hand are caused, so that there are few burst errors, and it is not necessary to use error correction including interlib. On the other hand, when the magnetic recording layer is provided on the surface of the medium of the CDROM or on the outside of the rear surface by coating, vapor deposition, or sputtering, the cartridge is used without a cartridge. For this reason, a large-scale burst error occurs due to oiliness of human hands or large dust or scratches.

In the medium of the present invention, Hc = 1900 Oe, and a magnetic recording layer having a space loss of 9 to 10 microns due to the printing layer and the protective layer is applied to the label side of the CD. The medium 10 ⁶ times recorded reproduced by 500BPI clogging wavelength 50μm by MFM modulation by the magnetic head of amorphous laminated type head gap 30 microns, shows the experimental results of measuring the frequency of appearance of each pulse width in Figure 203. FIG. 203 (a) shows the measurement result of the pulse width up to 1 ms, and FIG. 203 (b) is an enlarged view of the measurement data up to 100 μs.

To 10 ⁶ times the sample as indicated by the arrow 51a in FIG. 203 (a), a burst error longer periods has occurred several. Therefore, as shown in the error correction unit 35 in FIGS. 1 and 202, interleaving is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 207, ECC encoding is performed before or after interleaving.

Here, error correction will be quantitatively described in detail based on actual experimental data of the present invention. At ¹⁰⁶ times As can be seen from FIG. 203 (b), MFM modulation 1T, 1.5T, interval 2T are free enough. Therefore, considering the case where the condition is bad, an error rate of about 10 ^-5 to 10 ^-6 can be considered.

The occurrence of burst errors is so large that it cannot be seen with a disk inserted in a cartridge, for example, a floppy disk. Also, random errors are several orders of magnitude higher. In other words, it can be seen that interleaving and strong error correction are required to use without a cartridge. However, if the error correction code amount is too large, the redundancy increases and the data amount decreases. Therefore, as a target value for the countermeasure against the burst error, an allowable criterion of the damage of the CD is referred to. The probability of occurrence of scratches on the outer surface is the same for the optical recording surface and the label surface. FIG. 204 shows the error correction ability for a scratch on the optical recording surface in the case of a CD. When four symbols are corrected, a flaw corresponding to a maximum of 14 frames, that is, a flaw having a size of 2.38 mm can be corrected. The interleave length is 108 frames, that is, 18.36 mm. Therefore, optimal redundancy can be obtained by selecting an error correction capability including interleaving so that an error can be corrected even for a flaw of 2.38 mm or less in the magnetic recording layer. In this way, even if the user treats the magnetic recording unit in exactly the same way as a conventional CD or CD-ROM and damages the magnetic recording unit, the error correction including the interleave of the present invention and the error correction by the encoder 35 and the decoder 36 are performed. No data error occurs. Therefore, in the recording medium of the present invention, a great effect is obtained in that even if the recording medium is damaged as much as a CD, data reproduction is not hindered at all. The effect is that the user can easily handle the same as a CD.

In the case of the present invention, the interleave of 18 mm or more and the error correction of Reed-Solomon are used, and as shown in FIG. It was confirmed by experiments that the scratches on the surface could be corrected. It was found that under these conditions, a flaw of 2.38 mm or more comparable to a CD can be corrected. That is, a physical interleaving length L _M takes the interleave length L _D of the data as shown in FIG. 205 on the medium surface and to take 18 mm or more. Then, as shown in the error rate diagram of FIG. 206, by setting the data amount of the error correction code such as Reed-Solomon to a value of 0.08 to 0.32 times the original data, it is possible to correct an error for a scratch equivalent to a CD. That is a great effect. In this case, it is possible to perform the error correction with the minimum necessary redundancy corresponding to the damage similar to the CD, so that the entire data recording / reproducing efficiency is optimized and the substantial effect that the substantial recording capacity is maximized is obtained.

Here, the overall circuit configuration will be described. FIG. 202 shows the encoder 35 and the decoder 36 for error correction shown in FIG. 1 in detail. The magnetic recording signal is ECC-encoded by a Reed-Solomon decoder 35a for performing a Reed-Solomon encoding operation, and the interleaving unit 35b shown in FIG. In the interleave table, a data string that is continuous in the horizontal direction of the arrows 51a and 51aa and that is ECC-encoded is added with a horizontal parity 452a. When this data string is read in the vertical direction as shown by the arrow 51b, the original data is separated on the medium surface by the dispersion distance L as shown in FIG. 207 (b), and even if a burst error occurs, It can be restored by the parity 452. By setting the dispersion distance L on the medium surface to be 19 mm or more as described above, a recovery ability comparable to a CD can be obtained. When reproducing the magnetically recorded data, the reproduced signal is dispersed and recorded by de-interleaving 36b shown in FIG. 208 by mapping the data once to the RAM 36x and performing an address conversion reverse to that shown in FIG. 207. The recorded magnetic recording data is returned to the original arrangement. As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 210, the Reed-Solomon decoder 36a shown in FIG. 209 (b) inputs, for example, P and Q parities and recording data in step 452b, and calculates the syndromes S ₁ and S ₂ in step 452c. The process proceeds to step 452g only when S ₁ = S ₂ = 0 at 452d, and outputs data. When there is an error, an error correction operation is performed at step 452e, and only when the error is corrected at step 452f, the process proceeds to step 452g. Output data. In a CD, the data rate is high and the demodulation clock of EFM is 4.3218 MHz. For this reason, data processing is performed for error correction using a dedicated IC. However, the demodulation clock of the magnetic recording / reproducing unit of the present invention is 30 Kbps, which is 1/100 the data rate of CD, as shown in the experimental data of FIG. Paying attention to the point that the data processing amount is small, the error correction of the optical reproduction signal in the block diagram of FIG. 202 uses a dedicated IC while the signal of the error correction encoding unit 35 and the error correction decoding unit 36 of the magnetic recording reproduction signal. In the processing, the block enclosed by the thick dotted line frame including the system control unit 10 is subjected to the interleaving of FIG. 207 and the error correction calculation shown in the flowchart of FIG. 210 by time division using one microcomputer 10a.

(4) The microcomputer uses an 8-bit or 16-bit CPU chip with a clock of 10 to several tens of MHz. As shown in FIG. 210, two routines, a system control routine 452p and an error correction calculation routine 452a, are processed in a time-division manner. In step 452h, a system control routine is started. In step 452j, the rotation of the motor is controlled. In step 452k, actuators such as head lifting and traverse are controlled. In step 452m, drive display and input / output of the drive system are performed. Only when one operation unit of the system control is completed in step 452n and when an error correction process is necessary, an error correction calculation routine in step 452q is entered. In step 452r, the interleave or the interleave described in FIG. A deinterleave process is performed, and an error correction operation is performed in steps 452b to 452g as described above.

(4) Since the data rate of the optical reproduction signal of the CD is 1 Mbps or more, a normal one-chip microcomputer for drive control cannot share the error correction operation in terms of processing capability. However, since the data rate of the magnetic recording signal of the present invention is about 30 kbps, system control and error correction calculation can be performed in a time-division manner with one 8-bit or 16-bit commercially available one-chip microcomputer having a clock frequency of about 10 MHz. Therefore, the error correction of the optical reproduction is performed by the dedicated IC, and the error correction of the magnetic recording and reproduction is processed in a time-division manner by the control microcomputer, so that there is an advantage that an error correction circuit does not need to be added. As a result, it is not necessary to newly add an interleave and an error correction circuit, so that an effect that the configuration is young and simple can be obtained.

The block diagram of FIG. 211 employs a method of performing error correction once before and after interleaving, and the arrangement is changed, but the basic configuration is the same as in FIGS. Only the error correction unit will be described. The magnetic recording data is first ECC-encoded by the C2 Reed-Solomon error correction encoder 35a in the error correction coding unit 35, added with the C2 parity 45, and interleaved by the interleave unit 35b in the direction of the arrow 51a in the table as shown in FIG. The data in the horizontal direction is read out in the direction of the arrow 51b and in the vertical direction, and the data is output as shown in FIG. 212 (b). The error correction encoding in the vertical direction is performed by the encoder 35c, the C1 parity 453 is added, and the data is magnetically recorded on the medium. At the time of reproduction, after being demodulated by the MFM demodulation 30d, a random error is first corrected by the Reed-Solomon C1 error correction unit using the C1 parity, and then mapped by the deinterleave unit 36b in the RAM 36x of FIG. By the conversion, the data is changed to data in the horizontal direction of the original table and output. In this way, the burst errors are dispersed and become random errors. Thereafter, this random error is corrected in the Reed-Solomon C2 error correction unit 36a in FIG. 212, and error-free data is reproduced and output.

場合 In the case of the method of FIG. 211, error correction is performed in two stages before and after interleaving, so that an effect of being more robust against burst errors can be obtained. In the case of the present invention, as shown in the experimental data, one-stage error correction shown in FIG. 202 is sufficient. Although the basic system can be realized by one-stage correction, it is desirable to use two-stage error correction shown in FIG. 211 when recording and reproducing specially important data such as a personal identification number and an amount.

(4) As described above, a hybrid medium having a magnetic recording portion provided on the outer surface of a CD without a cartridge is inevitably affected by scratches, so that a conventional floppy-like configuration does not output normal data. Performing one-stage or two-stage error correction and interleaving as shown in FIGS. 202 and 211 has the effect of reliably recording and reproducing data, and enhances practicality.

(Example 2)
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

FIG. 19 is an overall block diagram of the second embodiment. FIG. 19 is obtained by adding a magnetic head 8a and a magnetic head circuit 31a to FIG. 1 described in the first embodiment. The other parts are the same and will not be described. As in the enlarged view of the magnetic head section in FIG. 20, the magnetic head 8 performs magnetic recording with a long recording wavelength on the entire magnetic recording layer 3 in the same manner as in the first embodiment. Next, the magnetic head 8a performs magnetic recording with a short recording wavelength on the surface layer 3a. As a result, magnetic recording can be finally performed on the surface layer 3a with a short wavelength sub-channel and on the deep layer 3b with an independent channel of a long wavelength main channel. As a result, when a long-wavelength magnetic head is used like the magnetic head for magnetic field modulation of the first embodiment, and the magnetic recording layer on which the two-layer recording is performed as shown in FIG. 20 of the second embodiment is reproduced. , The above main channel can be reproduced. Therefore, if the summary information is recorded in the main channel and the detailed information is recorded in the sub-channel, the summary information can be obtained even in the method of the first embodiment, and the compatibility between the two can be obtained. The enlarged view of the magnetic head portion in FIG. 21 shows a case where only the short-wavelength magnetic head 8 is mounted. In this case, a signal in which the main channel is superimposed on the above-mentioned sub-channel signal is reproduced, and both the main and sub-channels are reproduced. Since it is possible to reproduce, if this configuration is adopted in the case of a reproduction-only device, the cost is reduced. In the enlarged view of the magnetic head portion shown in FIG. 22, the upper part of the figure shows the case where recording is performed by a magnetic field modulation head, that is, the magnetic head 8 suitable for long wavelength, and the N pole part is 1 and the non-magnetized part is 0 as shown in the figure. Then, 0 is recorded at 120b in the magnetization regions 1 and 120a, and 1 is recorded at 120C, and the data string 121 of "101" is obtained. As shown in the lower part of the figure, when the N pole portion is set to 1 and the non-magnetized portion is set to 0 using the perpendicular magnetic head 8b suitable for a short wavelength, it becomes “10110110” like the data string 122, and the upper region 120a Eight bits can be recorded in the same area 120d. When the signal in the area 120d is reproduced by the magnetic head 8, it is determined to be "1" because only the N pole is used. This is the same as the region 120a. That is, "1" of the data string 122a can be reproduced. Next, if the S pole portion is defined as “0” and the non-magnetized portion is defined as “1” in the region 120e, “01001010” and 8 bits are recorded in the data string in this manner. When this is reproduced by the magnetic head 8, it is determined to be "0" because of only the S pole. This is 1 bit, and a signal having the same polarity as that of the area 120b is reproduced with a slightly weaker amplitude. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 22, in the short-wavelength magnetic head 8b, the signal of the data train 122a of the main channel D1 and the signal of the data train 122 of the sub-channel D2 are recorded and reproduced, and the long-wavelength magnetic head 8 for modulating the magnetic field is used. In this case, the effect is obtained that the data train 122a of the main channel D1 is reproduced, and both are compatible. The gap of the magnetic head 8 for modulating the magnetic field is 0.2 to 2 μm.

(Example 3)
Hereinafter, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

FIG. 23 is an enlarged view of a recording unit according to the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, the reflective film 84 having pits as shown in FIG. 9 described in the first embodiment is provided on the transparent substrate 5 of the recording medium 2, and the magnetic recording film 3 is provided. , C0-ferrite are formed by plasma CVD or the like. Since this material has a light-transmitting property, it has a high light transmittance when the thickness is small.

焦点 Focus the focal point 66 on this medium with the optical head 6 from the back side as shown in FIG. The lens 54 of the optical head 6 is connected to the slider 41 made of a light transmitting material by a connecting portion 150 having a spring effect. Further, the magnetic head 8 is embedded in the slider 41. Therefore, the optical head reads the pits of the reflection film 84 from behind, and the tracking and the focus are controlled. Then, the slider connected thereto is track-controlled, and travels on a specific optical track. Since the position error between the lens 54 and the slider 41 is generated only by the spring effect of the connecting portion 150, the slider 41 is controlled on the order of microns. Next, since the vertical direction is performed in conjunction with the focus control, the vertical direction is controlled in the order of several microns to several + microns.

磁 気 Then, magnetic recording is performed on the magnetic recording layer 3 one after another. In the case of this embodiment, since optical tracking is possible, there is a great effect that a track pitch of several microns can be realized. In addition, since the slider 41 and the magnetic head 8 are controlled in the vertical direction by the focus control, the slider 41 and the magnetic head 8 follow even if the surface accuracy of the substrate 5 of the recording medium 2 is poor. For this reason, a substrate with poor surface accuracy can be used, so that there is an effect that a plastic substrate or a non-polished glass substrate, which is much lower in cost than a polished glass substrate, can be used.

FIG. 23 shows a case where the optical head 6 reproduces data from the back surface of the recording medium 2. However, since the same recording medium can be reproduced from the surface by a mechanism like a conventional optical disc player, there is an effect of compatibility. Further, there is a remarkable effect that a memory capacity by one digit or more can be obtained by the optical tracking as compared with the related art.

(Example 4)
Hereinafter, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

FIG. 24 is a block diagram of a recording / reproducing apparatus according to the fourth embodiment. The fourth embodiment has the same configuration and basic operation as the recording / reproducing apparatus of FIG. 1 described in the first embodiment. For this reason, detailed description is omitted, and the description is limited to different parts. The difference between the fourth embodiment and the first embodiment is that in the first embodiment, the magnetic head 8 uses a head for modulating the magneto-optical recording magnetic field as it is, so that the perpendicular recording is performed as shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, as shown in the enlarged view of the magnetic recording section of FIG. 25, the magnetic recording layer of the recording medium 3 is formed by using the magnetic head 8 having two functions of the magnetic field modulation of the magneto-optical recording and the horizontal magnetic recording. Then, horizontal recording is performed on No. 3. Since the equivalent head gap of the magnetic field modulation head of the first embodiment, for example, the MD head, is usually as large as 100 μm or more, the recording wavelength λ is a long wavelength of several hundred μm. In this case, a demagnetizing field is generated, and the magnetic charge actually recorded is attenuated, so that the reproduction output is reduced. The first embodiment has an extremely great advantage that the cost is not increased because no change in the configuration is required, but has a disadvantage that the reproduction output is reduced.

水平 When long wavelength recording requires high reproduction output, horizontal recording is more suitable. In order to realize this horizontal recording, the fourth embodiment is basically the same as the first embodiment except that the configuration of the magnetic head is changed to change the recording method from vertical recording to horizontal recording. As shown in FIG. 25, the magnetic head 8 according to the fourth embodiment has a head gap 8c having a gap length of L, a main magnetic pole 8a also serving as a magnetic head for magnetic field modulation, and a sub magnetic pole 8b for forming a closed magnetic path. 40. The magnetic head 8 can be regarded as a ring head having a gap length L during horizontal recording. When performing a magnetic field modulation type magneto-optical recording, a uniform magnetic field is applied to the optical recording layer 4. First, in the case of the magnetic recording mode shown in FIG. 25, the optical head 6 focuses on the optical recording layer 4 to read track information or address information, and controls the optical head 6 so that the focal point 66 of a predetermined optical track is tracked. Is done. Accordingly, the magnetic head 8 connected to the optical head 6 also runs on a predetermined magnetic track. FIG. 25 is a view seen from the running direction and the vertical direction. As the recording medium 2 runs in the direction of the arrow 51, the horizontal magnetic recording signal is applied to the magnetic recording layer 3 in accordance with the recording signal sent from the magnetic recording block 9. 61 are recorded one after another. Assuming that the gap length is L and the recording wavelength is λ, λ> 2L. Therefore, the recording capacity can be increased as the gap length L decreases. However, when L is reduced, the range of the uniform magnetic field becomes narrower when a modulation magnetic field for magneto-optical recording is generated. For this reason, the recordable range of the focal point 66 of the optical head is narrowed, and the dimensional accuracy of the recording medium and the tracking mechanism must be increased, resulting in an increase in cost. As shown in the enlarged view of the magneto-optical recording in FIG. 26, when performing the magneto-optical recording, the focal point 66 of the optical recording layer 4 is heated by the laser beam from the optical head 6 and becomes higher than the Curie temperature. Then, the portion of the focal point 66 of the optical recording layer 4 is magnetized in the same direction as the magnetic field direction of the modulation magnetic field 85 by the magnetic head 8, and the optical recording signal 52 is recorded one after another. In this case, the positional relationship between the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 facing each other depends on the dimensional accuracy of the tracking mechanism such as the head base 19 as described above. In the case of MD, the standard of dimensional accuracy is loose to reduce cost. Therefore, when the worst conditions are considered, the positional relationship between the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 may be greatly deviated. Therefore, the range of the uniform magnetic field region 8e is required to be as wide as possible. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26, by providing the narrowed portion 8d in the main magnetic pole portion 8a of the magnetic head 8, the right magnetic fluxes 85a and 85b are converged and the magnetic field becomes stronger. For this reason, it becomes equivalent to the magnetic fluxes 85c, 85d, 85e, and 85f, and has the effect of expanding the uniform magnetic field region 8e. Thus, even if the relative positional relationship between the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 is displaced and the relative position between the focal point 66 and the magnetic head 8 is displaced, if the focal point 66 is within the range of the uniform magnetic field region 8e, the optimal modulation magnetic field will be reduced. And the magneto-optical recording is reliably performed, and the error rate does not deteriorate.

As shown in the enlarged view of the magneto-optical recording section in FIG. 31, the magnetic flux of the magnetic recording signal 61 of the magnetic recording layer 3 is formed as magnetic fluxes 86a, 86b, 86c and 86d. Therefore, at the time of magneto-optical recording, the focal point 66 causes the magnetic field of the magnetic flux 86a by the magnetic recording signal 61 and the modulation magnetic field from the magnetic head 8 to be applied to the magneto-optical recording material at the focal point 66 of the optical recording layer 4 which has reached the Curie temperature or higher. A magnetic field is applied. If the magnitude of the magnetic field of the magnetic flux 86a is greater than the magnitude of the modulating magnetic field from the magnetic head 8, magneto-optical recording with this portion of the modulating magnetic field does not operate normally. Therefore, it is necessary to keep the magnitude of the magnetic flux 86a below a certain value. Therefore, an interference layer 81 having a thickness d is provided between the magnetic recording layer 3 and the optical recording layer 4 to reduce the influence. Assuming that the shortest recording wavelength of the magnetic recording signal 61 is λ, the intensity of the magnetic flux 66 in the optical recording layer 4 is attenuated by about 54.6 × d / λ. In the case of a recording medium, use of various recording wavelengths λ is conceivable. The recording wavelength in the shortest case is generally λ = 0.5 μm. In this case, d is attenuated by about 60 dB if 0.5 μm, so that the influence of the magnetic recording signal 61 is almost eliminated.

As described above, the effect of eliminating the influence of the magnetic recording signal on the magneto-optical recording can be obtained by using an interference film of at least 0.5 μm between the magnetic recording layer 3 and the magneto-optical recording layer 4 of the recording medium 2. . In this case, the interference film is made of a non-magnetic material or a magnetic material having a small coercive force.

When performing magneto-optical recording and magnetic recording using a magneto-optical recording medium, if the modulating magnetic field of the magneto-optical recording is sufficiently smaller than the coercive force of the magnetic material of the magnetic recording layer, the modulating magnetic field will damage the recorded magnetic signal. There is no possibility. However, when a ring-type head is used as in the fourth embodiment, a strong magnetic field is generated in the head cap portion. Therefore, even if the modulation magnetic field is weak, the magnetic signal may be affected and the error rate may increase. In order to avoid this, when recording is performed by mounting a magneto-optical recording medium, as shown in the sectional view of the recording section in FIG. 27, the optical recording is performed before the main recording signal is recorded on the optical recording layer by the optical head 6. The magnetic recording signal recorded on the magnetic track 67g on the back surface of the optical track 65g in the area is transcribed to the memory section 34 or the optical recording layer of the recording / reproducing apparatus and is evacuated. There is no problem even if the data in the magnetic recording layer is destroyed by the modulating magnetic field during the magneto-optical recording due to the retraction.

This will be specifically described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The flowchart is roughly divided into six. In the discrimination step 201, disc attributes are discriminated, and in the case of an optical ROM disc, a read-only step 204 is used. When reproducing an optical RAM disk, a reproducing step 202 and, in some cases, a reproducing / transferring step 203 are performed. When recording on an optical RAM disk, a recording step 205 and possibly a recording / transfer step 206 are used. If there is free time, only the transcription is performed in the transcription step 207.

This flowchart will be described in detail. In the determination step 201, the recording medium 2, specifically, a disk is mounted in the step 220. In step 221, discrimination as to disc type, for example, ROM or RAM, magneto-optical medium, optical recording prohibition, magnetic recording prohibition, etc., is determined by a claw or the like engraved on the disc cassette in FIG. Next, at step 222, the optical head 6 moves to the position of the innermost optical track 65a and magnetic track 67a in FIG. In step 223, the data of the optical information and the magnetic information of the TOC are read out, and the music number at the end of the previous time is entered for a music disc, and the end stage number of the game is entered for a game disc. If the user wishes to continue, the user can return to the state at the time of the previous end. At step 224, the untransferred flag written in the magnetic TOC is read. If the untransferred flag = 1, it indicates that untransferred magnetic data remains in the optical data section. If the untransferred flag = 0, it indicates that there is no remaining. In step 225, it is determined whether the disk is a magneto-optical disk or a ROM disk. If the disk is a ROM disk, the process proceeds to step 238; If there is a reproduction command in step 238, the optical recording signal and the magnetic recording signal are reproduced in step 239, and if the operation is completed in step 240, various changes that have occurred during the reproduction period in step 241 such as the reproduced music The change of the order and the status such as the music number at the end are written in the TOC area of the magnetic track. After the writing is completed, the disc is ejected at step 242.

Now, return to step 226 for a magneto-optical disk. If there is a reproduction command, the process proceeds to step 227; otherwise, the process proceeds to step 243. In step 227, the main recording signal on the optical recording surface is reproduced at a higher speed than the normal reproducing speed, and the signals are sequentially stored in the memory. In the case of a music signal, in order to store data for several seconds, music is not interrupted even if playback is interrupted during this time. When the memory becomes full in step 228, if the untransferred flag = 1 in step 229, the reproduction of the main recording signal is interrupted, and the process proceeds to step 230 in the reproduction transcription step 203. It is checked whether the reproduction of all the sub-recording signals on the magnetic recording surface has been completed. If Yes, the process proceeds to step 234; In step 232, it is checked whether the output of the main recording signal such as a music signal stored is still possible. If No, the process returns to step 227 to reproduce and store the main recording signal. If Yes, when the sub-recording signal reaches the set memory amount in Step 233, it is checked again whether the main recording signal can be stored and reproduced in Step 234, and if Yes, the sub-recording signal stored in the memory in Step 235. Is transferred to the transfer area of the optical recording surface, and it is checked in step 236 whether the transfer of all data has been completed. If No, the process returns to step 230 to continue the transfer. Change and return to step 226.

If recording is to be performed on the optical recording layer, the process proceeds to step 243 of the recording step 205, where the recording command is checked. At step 245, it is checked whether there is enough memory. If No, optical recording of the main recording signal is performed at step 245a, and the process returns to step 243. If yes, the process proceeds to step 246; if the unposted flag is not 1, the process returns to step 243; if 1, the process proceeds to step 247 in the recorded transcription step 206.

{Circle around (2)} In step 247, the main recording signal is stored in the memory, and at the same time, the sub-recording signal of the magnetic track 67g on the back side of the optical track 65g of FIG. At step 248, it is checked whether there is enough room in the main recording signal storage memory. If Yes, the sub recording signal is transferred to the optical recording layer at step 248a. If No, the process returns to step 245a to perform optical recording. In step 249, it is checked whether the transfer of all data has been completed. If Yes, the untransferred flag is changed from 1 to 0 in step 250, and the process returns to step 243. If No, the process returns to step 243.

チ ェ ッ ク It is checked in step 243 whether there is a recording command. If No, the process proceeds to step 251 in the transfer step 207. Here, since neither recording nor reproduction of the main recording signal is required, only the transfer of the sub recording signal on the magnetic data surface to the optical data surface is performed. At step 251, the sub-recording signal is reproduced and stored in the memory, and at step 252, the data is transferred to the optical recording layer. In step 253, it is checked whether or not all the transfer has been completed. If No, the process returns to step 251 to continue the transfer. If Yes, the untransferred flag is changed from 1 to 0 in Step 254, and it is checked in Step 255 whether all operations have been completed. If No, the process returns to the first Step 226. If Yes, the process proceeds to step 256, in which the information changed in this operation, the information of the untransferred flag = 0, and the like are magnetically recorded in the TOC area of the magnetic track. Complete.

In step 256, it is also possible to restore the magnetic recording layer to a state before optical recording by writing all of the sub recording signals stored in the memory to the magnetic recording layer again.

As described above, the data of only the magnetic track that is destroyed by the modulation magnetic field of the optical recording among the data on the magnetic recording surface is saved to the memory or the optical recording surface, whereby the data destruction of the magnetic recording surface can be substantially prevented. There is.

(4) By recording and restoring the save data on the magnetic track again after the end of the optical recording operation, even if magneto-optical recording is performed, the effect that the data on the magnetic recording surface is restored when the disk is ejected is obtained.

場合 In the case of FIG. 28, a method is used in which data that may destroy the magnetic recording surface is transferred to the optical recording surface before magneto-optical recording is performed. On the other hand, in the case of the flowchart of FIG. 29, a method of not transferring data to the optical recording surface is used. The determination step 201, the reproduction step 202, and the reproduction-only step 204 in the flowchart of FIG. 29 are the same as those in FIG. Further, since no transcription is performed, the reproduction transcription step 203, the recording transcription step 206, and the transcription step 207 are not required. Since only the recording step 205 differs, a detailed description will be given below.

{Circle around (2)} In step 226 of the reproduction step 202, it is checked whether or not there is a reproduction command. If No, proceed to step 264; In step 260, the optical track corresponding to the magnetic track unit is managed, the applicable magnetic track destroyed by the magneto-optical recording on the back surface of the optical track is calculated, and it is checked whether the applicable track is the same as the previously evacuated track. If so, in step 263, magneto-optical recording on the optical track is performed. If No, the data of the previous magnetic track can be completely restored by writing the save data to the previous magnetic track in step 261. Next, in step 262, the data of the magnetic track to be destroyed this time is read and saved in the memory. Thereafter, in step 263, recording is performed on the optical track, and the process returns to step 243. In the case of No in Step 243, the previous magnetic track is restored in Step 261a, and it is checked whether the operation is completed in Step 264 of the end step 206. If No, the process returns to Step 226. The information changed until the end, for example, the end tune number of the music is magnetically recorded. Then, in step 266, the disc is ejected. The work is thus completed, and when the next disk is mounted, the work is started again from step 220.

In the case of FIG. 28, all the magnetic data is transcribed to the optical recording layer so that the magnetic data may be destroyed by the optical recording. On the other hand, in the case of FIG. 29, the magnetic data is managed for each magnetic track unit. Then, only the magnetic data of the corresponding magnetic track to be destroyed by magneto-optical recording is stored in the read memory, and the magnetic track is destroyed by magneto-optical recording and optically recorded on a magnetic track different from the relevant magnetic track. At this point, the magnetic track is completely restored. As a result, a memory capacity of one to three magnetic tracks can be used, so that the memory is small. As is clear from the flowchart, there is an effect that magnetic data can be protected from destruction of magneto-optical recording by simple processing.

Also, as shown in the cross-sectional view when the magneto-optical disk is mounted in FIG. 30A and the cross-sectional view when the CD is mounted in FIG. 30B, the magneto-optical disk and the CD can be reproduced using the same mechanism. In this case, the CD is susceptible to external magnetism since the outside is not protected by a cartridge. By making the coercive force of the magnetic recording layer 3 of the CD significantly higher than that of the magnetic recording layer of the magneto-optical medium, for example, 1000 to 3000 Oe, there is an effect of preventing destruction of magnetic data by an external magnetic field. In the case of a magneto-optical disk, increasing the coercive force approaches the magnitude of the modulation magnetic field in the magneto-optical recording layer, which has an effect. For this reason, it is lowered to 1000 Oe or less.

(Example 5)
Hereinafter, a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

FIG. 32 is a block diagram of a recording / reproducing apparatus according to the fifth embodiment. The fifth embodiment has the same configuration and basic operation as those of FIGS. 1 and 24 described in the first and fourth embodiments. For this reason, detailed description is omitted, and the description is limited to different parts. The difference between the fifth embodiment and the first embodiment is that, in the fourth embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25, the ring-type magnetic head 8 having one coil 40 performs magnetic recording, reproduction of a magnetic recording signal, and magneto-optical recording. In this method, one function performs three functions of generating a modulated magnetic field. For this reason, the configuration is simple, but there are contradictory elements in order to balance the three, and there is a possibility that problems such as a decrease in reproduction efficiency and a narrow uniform magnetic field region may occur. For this reason, the design of the head is difficult, and the processing is also difficult.

That is, the wiring circuit is simple because of the simple configuration, but it is difficult in terms of design and processing.

In view of this point, as shown in the enlarged view of the magnetic recording in FIG. 33, the fifth embodiment has two coils, that is, two coils of the magnetic field modulation coil 40a and the magnetic recording coil 40b. Returning to the block diagram of FIG. 32, at the time of magnetic recording or reproduction, the magnetic head circuit 31 supplies a current to the magnetic recording coil 40b or receives a current from the coil to perform magnetic recording and reproduction.

(4) When performing a magnetic field modulation type magneto-optical recording, a modulation signal is supplied from the magnetic field modulation circuit 37a in the optical recording circuit 37 to the magnetic field modulation coil 40a to perform the magneto-optical recording.

The operation during magnetic recording and reproduction will be described with reference to FIG. The recording current from the magnetic head circuit 31 flows through the coil 40b in the direction of the arrow. As a result, closed magnetic paths for the magnetic fluxes 86c, 86a, 86b are formed, and the magnetic recording signals 61 are sequentially recorded on the magnetic recording layer 3. It becomes a horizontal magnetic recording. In this case, basically, no current flows through the magnetic field modulation coil 40a. With this configuration, a closed magnetic path including the gap 8c is formed, and the reproduction sensitivity can be optimally designed.

Next, the operation at the time of magneto-optical recording will be described with reference to the enlarged view of magneto-optical recording of FIG. The magnetic field modulation coil 40a is wound in the same direction on both the main magnetic pole 8a and the sub magnetic pole 8b of the yoke. Therefore, when the modulation current flows from the magnetic field modulation circuit 37a in the direction of the arrow 51a, downward magnetic fluxes 85a, 85b, 85c, and 85d are generated. Then, the magneto-optical recording material at the focal point 66 of the optical recording layer 4 and having a Curie temperature or higher is magnetization-reversed by this magnetic field, and the optical recording signal 52 is recorded. In this case, the strength of the magnetic field at the focal point 66 is generally set to 50 to 150 Oe in the range of the uniform magnetic field region 8e. In this case, as shown in FIG. 25, it is preferable to provide the interference layer 81 so that the magnetization of the magneto-optical recording material is not reversed by the magnetic recording signal 61. If this thickness is d, then λ> d in this case. With the configuration shown in FIG. 34, an effect that the uniform magnetic field region 8e can be widened is obtained. In addition, since the head can be designed independently for each of the two coils, there is an effect that an optimum magnetic field modulation characteristic, an optimum magnetic recording characteristic and an optimum magnetic reproduction characteristic can be obtained. Since the head gap 8c in FIG. 33 can be reduced, the wavelength at the time of magnetic recording can be shortened. Further, since the optimum design for forming the closed magnetic circuit can be performed, the reproduction sensitivity is also improved. Further, as shown in FIG. 34, when the magnetic field is modulated, the magnetic flux 85a of the main magnetic pole 8a and the magnetic flux 85d of the sub magnetic pole 8b are in the same direction, so that a strong magnetic field is not generated in the gap 8c as in the fourth embodiment. Only a weak magnetic field of the modulation magnetic field is generated. Since the coercive force of the magnetic recording layer 3 is 800 to 1500 Oe, which is sufficiently higher than the modulating magnetic field and has an axis of easy magnetization in the horizontal direction, there is an effect that the magnetic recording signal 61 is not destroyed by the modulating magnetic field. Therefore, in Example 4, data is not destroyed by setting the coercive force Hc of the magnetic recording layer 3 higher than the recording magnetic field Hmax of the magneto-optical recording material. In this case, Hc <2Hmax is satisfied because a double margin is enough. What is necessary is just to manufacture the recording medium 2 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 35, the magnetic head 8 can independently wind the coil 40a around the main magnetic pole 8a and the coil 40b around the sub-magnetic pole 8b. In this case, at the time of magnetic field modulation, a magnetic flux 85d is generated by flowing a modulation current in the direction of the arrow 51b to the magnetic recording coil 40b using the magnetic head circuit 31 and the magnetic flux 85c, 85b, 85a by the magnetic field modulation coil 40a. In the same direction, the same effect as in FIG. 34 can be obtained.

Alternatively, by winding one winding as shown in FIG. 36 and providing the tap 40c, two coils can be formed by three terminals. At the time of magnetic recording, the tap 40c and the tap 40e are used.

(4) At the time of magneto-optical recording, a modulation magnetic field for magneto-optical recording is generated using the taps 40d and 40e as shown in FIG. As a result, the head can be configured with three taps, so that there is an effect that the wiring is simplified.

(Example 6)
Hereinafter, a sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

FIG. 38 is a block diagram of a recording / reproducing apparatus according to the sixteenth embodiment. The sixth embodiment is the first embodiment, the fourth embodiment, and particularly the fifth embodiment, and the basic operation is the same as that of FIGS. 1, 24, and 32 described above. For this reason, detailed description is omitted, and the description is limited to different parts. The difference between the sixth embodiment and the fifth embodiment is as follows. In the fifth embodiment, one coil is provided separately from the magnetic modulation coil to perform magnetic recording. Therefore, degaussing and recording cannot be performed simultaneously. However, floppy disks require simultaneous operations. Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, two gaps 8c and 8e are provided in the magnetic head 8 as shown in FIG. Further, two coils 40b and 40f are connected to the magnetic head circuit 31, one of which is used for recording and the other is used for degaussing. Thus, degaussing and recording can be performed simultaneously with one head.

Next, an enlarged view of the magnetic recording section in FIG. 39 shows a specific configuration of the magnetic head 8. As shown in FIG. 33, the configuration is such that a second secondary magnetic pole 8d is added separately from the secondary magnetic pole 8b. As described with reference to FIG. 33, magnetic recording is performed by the magnetic recording coil 40b, but before that, a degaussing current is passed from the magnetic head circuit 31 by the second sub-magnetic pole 8d. Thus, degaussing of the magnetic recording layer 3 can be performed in the gap 8e before recording. For this reason, when magnetic recording is performed in the gap 8c, ideal recording can be performed, and C / N and S / N are improved, and the error rate is reduced. A top view of the magnetic recording unit in FIG. 41 shows this state as viewed from the vertical direction of the recording medium 2. As shown in FIG. 41, guard hands 67f and 67g are provided on both sides of the recording track 67. First, degaussing is performed in the width of the degaussing region 210 by the gap 8e of the second sub magnetic pole 8d. Therefore, the entire area of the recording track 67 and a part of the guard bands 67f and 67g are demagnetized. Therefore, even if a track shift of the magnetic head 8 occurs, the gap 8c does not deviate from the degaussing area 210. Therefore, when magnetic recording is performed using the gap 8c, recording can be performed in a good state.

Furthermore, as shown in the top view of the magnetic recording section in FIG. 42, the degaussing gap may be divided and two gaps 8e and 8h may be provided. As a result, the recording medium 2 is caused to run in the direction indicated by the arrow 51 in the opposite direction of FIG. And record. This overlapped portion is demagnetized by the two degaussing regions 210a and 210b. Therefore, the guard bands 67f and 67g are completely secured. This has the effect of reducing crosstalk between recording tracks and lowering the error rate. Next, a case where the magnetic field modulation of magneto-optical recording is performed using the magnetic head 8 will be described with reference to an enlarged view of the magnetic field modulation unit in FIG. Since the magnetic field modulating coil 40a is wound around the main magnetic pole 8a, the sub magnetism 8b, and the second sub magnetism 8d, magnetic fluxes 85a, 85b, 85c, 85d, and 85e are uniformly generated in each magnetic pole. Therefore, there is an effect that a wide uniform magnetic field region 8e can be obtained. Therefore, even if the dimensional accuracy of the track position is low, the focal point 66 does not deviate from the optical recording track 65.

Next, the magnetic head 8 shown in the enlarged view of the magnetic recording unit in FIG. 43 is obtained by changing the winding method of the coil of the magnetic head 8 described in FIG. As shown in the figure, a magnetic field modulation coil 40d is extended to double as a magnetic recording coil, and an intermediate tap 40c is provided. Thereby, magnetic recording can be performed by the tap 40c and the tap 40e. Further, as shown in the enlarged view of the magnetic field modulating unit 44 in FIG. 44, the current in the directions of the arrows 51a and 51b is applied to the taps 40d and 40e and the arrow 51c is applied to the tap 40f, so that the magnetic fluxes 85a, 85b, 85c, 85d and 85e are generated, and a uniform modulation magnetic field is generated. In this case, there is an effect that the number of taps is reduced by one and the configuration is simplified. As described in detail above, the use of the magnetic head 8 of the sixth embodiment has a great effect that one head can share the degaussing head, the magnetic recording head, and the magnetic field modulation head for magneto-optical recording.

(Example 7)
Hereinafter, a seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

(7) The seventh embodiment mainly relates to a disk cassette for storing a medium. The top view of the disk cassette in FIG. 45A shows a state in which the movable shutter 301 of the disk cassette 42 is closed. As described above, since not only the head hole 302 but also the liner holes 303a, 303b, and 303c are protected by the shutter 301, there is an effect that dust does not enter. As shown in FIG. 45B, the shutter is opened with the insertion of the disc cassette 42 into the main body in the direction of arrow 51. Therefore, both the head hole 302 and the liner holes 303a, 303b, 303c are opened. As shown in FIG. 46, a single rectangular liner hole 303 may be provided. 47 and 48, a liner hole may be provided in a direction opposite to the head hole 302. In this case, as shown in the top views of the liners in FIGS. 49 (a), (b) and (c), the liner 304, the liner support portion 305 made of a leaf spring or a plastic sheet, and the liner support portion plate attaching portions 306a-d. The portion of the liner other than the liner movable portion 305a is fixed to the disk cassette 42. As shown in FIG. 49C, a liner groove 307 is dug in the cassette half. The liner movable portion 305a is housed in the groove 307. The sub liner support 305b presses from above. In this way, the flatness of the liner support portion 305a is maintained by the restoring force of the spring unless an external force is applied. In this state, the liner 303 does not contact the recording layer on the surface of the recording medium 2. Therefore, abrasion of the recording layer 3 is normally prevented.

Next, when an external force is applied by the liner pin 310 from the liner hole 303 to the inside of the disk cassette 42 through the liner hole 303 as necessary, the liner support portion 305 and the liner 304 are connected to the liner 305 as long as the liner pin pressed against the media surface is not pressed. The recording layer of the medium 2 does not contact.

Another configuration of the disc cassette is shown in FIGS. 50 (a), (b) and (c) in which the leaf spring of the liner support portion 303a is given a deformation in the upper direction of the disc cassette as shown in FIG. 50 (c). As a result, when it is fixed to the disk cassette 42 as shown in FIG. Therefore, the recording medium 2 does not contact the liner 304 unless the recording medium 2 is pushed downward by the liner pin 310. The effect that the auxiliary liner support portion 305b can be omitted can be obtained stably.

Next, a method for switching between contact and non-contact between the liner and the disk by the liner pin 310 will be described. FIG. 51 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A ′ in FIG. 49A. The liner pin 310 is pulled up in the liner pin guide 311 in the direction of the arrow 51a. Therefore, the liner 304 and the recording layer 3 of the recording medium 2 are not in contact. Therefore, since the frictional force at the time of rotation of the recording medium 2 is small, the recording medium 2 rotates even with a weak driving force. Next, as shown in FIG. 52, when the liner pin 310 is pushed down by an external force in the direction of the arrow 51, the main liner 304 is pressed against the magnetic recording layer 3 of the recording medium 2 via the liner support 305. As the recording medium 2 rotates or runs in the direction of the arrow 51, foreign substances such as dust and dirt on the magnetic recording layer 3 are removed by the liner 304 made of a nonwoven fabric or the like. Therefore, when magnetic recording / reproducing or magnetic field modulation of magneto-optical recording is performed by the recording head 8 in the head hole 301 in FIG. 46, the effect that the error rate is greatly reduced can be obtained. The material of the liner is the same as that of the conventional floppy liner, and for example, a nonwoven fabric is used. In this case, in the rotation direction indicated by the arrow 51a, the liner pin 310 is provided in the portion of the magnetic recording layer 3 in front of the magnetic head 8 as shown in FIG. . In this case, even if the liner control method of the present invention is used for the contact-type magneto-optical recording disk cassette 42 in which the normal magnetic recording layer 3 is not provided, dust is reduced and the error rate during magneto-optical recording is improved. The effect is obtained.

For controlling the liner pin 310, for example, as shown in FIG. 53B, the magnetic head 3 and the liner pin 310 are linked, and when the magnetic head 3 comes into contact, the liner 304 always comes into contact with the recording medium 2. With this, the actuator can also be used. If the magnetic head 3 is not in contact, the liner pin 310 is raised as necessary to prevent the liner 304 from contacting. As shown in FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (b), when the liner pin 310 and the magnetic head 8 are linked, the cassette 42 comes into contact only when the cassette 42 has an identification hole of the magnetic recording layer. And the recording medium 2 do not contact. This prevents the surface of the magnetic recording layer 3 from being worn by the liner 304 when not needed. At the same time, since the frictional force is reduced, there is an effect that the rotational torque of the motor is reduced and the power consumption is reduced. When the recording medium 2 having no magnetic recording layer is inserted, the magnetic head 8 does not contact the recording medium 2 as shown in FIG. Further, even if the disk cassette 42 of the present invention is mounted on a conventional recording apparatus which does not support the magnetic recording method of the present invention, as shown in the elevational view of the magnetic head in FIGS. Since there is no liner pin 310 and no lifting function, the liner 304 and the recording medium 2 do not contact each other as shown in FIG. Let me do. Therefore, there is an effect that compatibility between the media and the conventional device is maintained. Further, even if the conventional disk cassette 42 without the liner 304 or the liner hole 303 is mounted on the recording / reproducing apparatus of the present invention, the liner hole 303 is not removed as shown in the elevational view of the magnetic head in FIGS. The liner pin 310 is not inserted. Therefore, the liner pin 310 does not contact the recording medium 2 or the liner 304. Therefore, even if a conventional medium is inserted into the recording / reproducing apparatus of the present invention, the problem is not eliminated at all, and there is an effect that compatibility between them is maintained. In this case, the lubricant of the conventional recording medium adheres to the contact surface of the magnetic head 8, and the error rate deteriorates. To prevent this, the cleaning track 67x is set as shown in the top view of the recording medium of the present invention in FIG. When the recording medium 2 of the present invention is inserted into the recording / reproducing apparatus of the present invention after the conventional recording medium 2 has been mounted and detached, the inserted magnetic head 8 is first run at least once over the cleaning track 67x. . As a result, the above-mentioned dust adheres to the cleaning truck 67x. This dust is further in contact with the recording medium 2. Removed by liner 304. As a result, dust on the contact surface of the magnetic head 8 is finally removed, and there is an effect that reliable recording and reproduction with a low error rate can be performed. Also, the cross-sectional views of the liner elevating unit in FIGS. 57A and 57B show an OFF state and an ON state of the liner pin, respectively. 58 and 59 are cross-sectional views of the liner elevating unit when FIGS. 51 and 52 are viewed from the running direction of the recording medium 2, respectively.

Next, an embodiment using a leaf spring type liner pin 310 will be described. The cross-sectional views of the liner pin portion in FIGS. 60 and 61 and the front cross-sectional views of the liner pin portion in FIGS. 62 and 63 are the entire cross-sectional views of the liner pin portion of the leaf spring when the liner pin 310 of the leaf spring is used. An OFF state and an ON state are shown, respectively. In this case, the liner pin 310 is driven by the elevating motor 21 via the pin driving lever 312 in the directions of arrows 51 and 51a to be turned ON and OFF. The front cross-sectional views of the liner pins of FIGS. 64 and 65 show the OFF state and the ON state when the liner pin 310 is used and the rectangular single-hole liner hole 303 shown in FIG. In this case, the contact area between the liner pin and the liner mounting portion is increased, so that there is an effect that dust can be reliably removed.

前 In the front sectional views of the liner pin shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the liner guide 311 is provided with a protective portion 311a. As shown in FIG. 66, the disc cassette 42 of the present invention is also provided with a recognition hole 313. Therefore, when the disk cassette 42 of the present invention is inserted as shown in the drawing, the liner pin 310 is inserted into the liner hole 303. However, when the conventional disc cassette 42 having no recognition hole 313 is inserted, the liner pin 310 does not contact the case of the disc cassette 42 because the protective film 314 hits the case of the disc cassette 42 as shown in FIG. Therefore, there is an effect that the liner pin 310 can be prevented from being stained or damaged.

(Example 8)
Hereinafter, an eighth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

In the eighth embodiment, a method is disclosed in which the liner pin is pushed up from the lower surface direction of the disk cassette to raise and lower the liner.

デ ィ ス ク As shown in the perspective top view of the disk cassette in FIGS. 68 (a) and (b), there is no liner hole on the upper surface. A liner hole 303 is provided adjacent to the recognition holes 313a, 313b, 313c on the back side, and a liner pin is inserted into the liner hole 303 from the back side in the figure, and the liner is raised and lowered. FIGS. 69 (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views taken along the line A-A 'in FIG. 68 of the liner elevating unit. First, as shown in FIG. 69 (a), when the liner pin 310 is in the OFF state, the liner pin 304 and the recording medium 2 do not contact. As shown in FIG. 69 (b), when the liner pin 310 is inserted into the recognition hole 313, the liner driving portion 316 formed of a deformed and shaped leaf spring is pushed rightward in the figure by the liner pin 310 and the pin shaft 315 is centered. As it rotates counterclockwise. As a result, the liner support portion 305 is pushed downward by the liner driving portion 316, so that the liner 304 and the recording medium 2 come into contact with each other, and dust is removed with the rotation.

Next, the structure of the liner will be described. As shown in the configuration diagrams of the liners in FIGS. 70A, 70B and 70C, the structure of the liner is basically the same as the structure described in FIG. However, the difference is that a movable portion 305a is provided at the tip of the drive unit of the liner drive unit 316, and that a liner drive groove 30a for accommodating the liner drive unit 316 is added as shown in FIG. .

{Here, the structure of the liner pin 310 on the main body side will be described. The liner pin 310 and the motor 17 are in a positional relationship as shown in a sectional view of a peripheral portion in FIG. As shown in the cross-sectional view of the periphery of the liner pin in FIG. 72 (a), if the disk cassette 42 of the present invention is inserted in the direction of arrow 51, the liner 304 interlocks without providing a liner pin actuator. Up and down. However, when the conventional disk cassette 42 is inserted as shown in FIG. 72 (b), there is no liner hole 303, so the liner pin 310 is automatically lowered by the spring 317 and the conventional disk cassette 42 is destroyed. There is an effect that no bad influence such as dripping is given. In this case, for applications where the frequency of disk access is low, such as a game machine, the liner pin does not need to be provided with an actuator, so that the configuration is simplified. As shown in FIGS. 73A and 73B, the liner pin 310 can be linked by the lifting unit 20 and the connecting unit 318 using one lifting motor 21. When this structure is used, the liner 304 always contacts the recording medium 2 when the magnetic head 8 contacts the recording medium 2, so that there is an effect that the actuator can also be used. The cross-sectional views of the disk cassettes of FIGS. 74 (a) and 74 (b) are basically the same as those of FIG. 69. However, since the liner driving section 316 is extended and a pin shutter section 319 is added, FIG. As shown in (2), when the liner pin is turned off, the pin shutter 319 is closed, and there is an effect that external dust can be prevented from flowing into the disk cassette 42. In this structure, since the vicinity of the recognition hole of the disk cassette is used, only one small hole needs to be added to the conventional disk cassette. Therefore, there is an effect that compatibility of the cassette structure is further improved. Also, the structure of FIG. 69 has an effect that the required space in the horizontal direction is small. For this reason, for example, the liner hole 303a can be provided even in a portion where there is almost no mounting space as in the cross section B-B 'in FIG.

(Example 9)
Hereinafter, a ninth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

９Embodiment 9 shows an embodiment in which the space for mounting the liner driving unit 316 is sufficient. The top view of the disk cassette in FIG. 75 is a configuration viewed from the top of the ninth embodiment, and the configuration of the liner 305 liner mounting portion 305a is substantially the same as that of FIG. In this embodiment, a liner elevating part 305c is provided on the movable part 305a of the liner mounting part 305. The liner 305 is moved up and down by pushing this portion down on the drawing by the liner driving unit 316. This will be described with reference to cross-sectional views taken along line A-A 'of FIG. 75 and FIGS. As shown in FIG. 76, when the liner pin 310 is OFF, the pin shutter 319 is pushed down by the spring 307 so that no dust enters from outside. The liner support portion 305 and the movable portion 305a are also pressed against the upper surface by the effect of the leaf spring and the sub liner support portion 305b. Therefore, the liner 304 is not in contact with the recording medium 2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77, when the liner pin 310 is turned ON, the pin shutter 319 causes the liner driving unit 316 to rotate clockwise around the pin shaft 316 to push down the liner elevating unit 305c. Is pressed down, the liner 304 comes into contact with the recording medium 2, and the foreign matter on the disk surface is removed with the rotation in the direction of the arrow 51. Therefore, the effect that the error rate is reduced can be obtained. In the case of the ninth embodiment, the effect is obtained that the structure is simple and the liner can be raised and lowered reliably. Further, since it is not necessary to provide a groove in the disk cassette 42a, an effect is obtained that the strength of the cassette is not impaired.

Furthermore, when it is attached to the cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B ′ of the cassette top view in FIG. 68A, the structure is as shown in the cross-sectional view of the liner pin in FIGS. Since the operation is the same as in the case of FIGS. 76 and 77, a detailed description is omitted. As shown in FIG. 78A, when the liner pin 310 is turned off, the liner hole is closed by the pin shutter 319. As shown in FIG. 78 (b), when the liner pin 310 is turned on, the liner driving unit 315 rotates counterclockwise to lower the liner elevating unit 305C and push down the liner mounting unit 305a and the liner 304, so that the liner and the recording medium come into contact. In this case, as compared with FIG. 76, there is an effect that the liner can be moved up and down in a shorter space. If the liner and the recording medium are released when the liner pin 310 is inserted, the liner comes into contact when not in use, and the frictional force prevents the recording medium from rotating, thereby preventing the recording medium from being destroyed. is there.

(Example 10)
Hereinafter, a recording priming apparatus according to a tenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

The basic configuration is the same as that of the block diagram of FIG. First, the tracking method will be described in detail. As shown in the uncorrected tracking principle diagram in FIG. 79, in an ideal setting state, the magnetic head 8 on the upper surface and the optical head 6 on the lower surface have the same upper and lower positional relationship. Therefore, when the optical head accesses the optical track 65 of a specific optical address, the magnetic head 8 runs on the corresponding magnetic track 67 on the back surface. In this case, no DC offset voltage of the tracking error signal of the optical head actuator 18 is generated. However, actually, due to the product variation of the spring constant of the actuator or the application of gravity G due to the inclination of the device, a deviation of ΔL, specifically, several tens to several hundreds μm, occurs between the actuator and the center 321b of the optical actuator 18. . The center 321C of the magnetic head 8 facing the center 321a of the optical actuator 18 also has a displacement due to an assembly error. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 79B, a position shift occurs between the magnetic head 8 and the optical head 6 facing each other.

(4) Even if the optical head 6 reruns the optical track of a specific address, there is a possibility that another magnetic track is accessed because there is no correspondence with the magnetic track tracked by the magnetic head 8. Specifically, the track pitch of the magnetic track is usually 50 to 200 μm. If the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 are located at the center, the maximum distance is several hundred μm. Therefore, under bad conditions, the magnetic head 8 may run on a magnetic track adjacent to a target track, and erroneous data may be recorded.

In order to avoid this, in the present invention, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), an offset voltage ΔV _o is given to the tracking control signal, and the optical head 6 is moved so that the optical pickup 6 comes behind the reference magnetic track 67z. The eccentricity of L is adopted. In other words, if the eccentricity is always decentered by the eccentricity correction amount ΔL, in the case of a stationary machine, the magnetic head 8 and the optical head 6 always face each other with high accuracy in the vertical direction, and the correlation between the optical track 65 and the magnetic track 67 increases. With a mechanical precision of, the track deviation is within a range of several μm to several tens μm.

In this way, even if the track pitch is 50 μm, the magnetic head can be tracked to the target magnetic track based on the optical address.

As shown in FIG. 80 (b), if this offset voltage ΔV _o is applied, the optical head 6 is decentered by ΔL, and by accessing the address of the optical track 68, the magnetic head 8 is shifted to the desired magnetic field. The track 67 will be accessed.

Here, a method of calculating the offset voltage ΔV _o will be described.

(1) First, a method for determining the average track radius of a disk as a measure against eccentricity will be described. In the CD or mini-disc (MD) standard, the eccentricity of the optical track 65 occurs at a maximum of 200 μm. On the other hand, the track pitch of the magnetic track 67 is 2DD, that is, 200 μm in the 135 TPI class. Therefore, it is difficult to access the target magnetic track 67 on the back surface by referring to the address of the optical track 65 without taking any measures.

As shown in FIG disk eccentricity of FIG 81 (a), between the track 65 _T when not to apply servo optical track 65 _PM and the optical head 6 was pre-master △ r _n becomes eccentricity occurs.

Here, when tracking servo is applied to the optical head without moving the traverse, it is possible to detect the occurrence of a tracking error signal as shown in FIG. 81 (b) due to the eccentricity of the optical track.

If you set the optical track address at theta = 0 ° in the read reference point, the tracking radius by eccentricity r _n - △ r _n, and the draw smaller radius than the radius r _n of the designed tracking. Further, r _n + △ r _n becomes reversed when theta = 180 degrees, draw a larger radius than r _n.

When the track pitch is 100 to 200 μm, and when the optical track has an eccentricity of ± 200 μm, the track radius itself changes unless track servo is applied.

As shown in the figure, the error is smallest at θ = 90 ° and θ = 270 °. Therefore, theta = 90 °, by determining the center position of the light tracks on the basis of the address of the optical track 65 _PM at 270 °, determined radius r _n of the n tracks of the set value.

As apparent from FIG. 81, when theta = 90 ° theta = 270 °, △ r _n = 0, and the standard track radius r _n obtained.

The positions of {θ = 90 ° and 270 ° are obtained from the tracking error signal of FIG. 81 (c).

By using the address of the optical track 65 in a position on an extension of this angle, by track the optical head to the optical address 65s, the standard track radius r _n can be obtained, can be tracked by more accurate magnetic head This has the effect of becoming

The optical address 320 is recorded on the first track or the TOC track of the magnetic track 67.

In the case of the CD and MD formats, the number of pieces of address information in one round of one optical track is small. Therefore, 360 addresses of all angles cannot be obtained at 360 °.

わ か る As shown in FIG. 86, it can be understood how many blocks at address 1 correspond to the angle θ. This provides, for example, an angular resolution of one degree. Therefore, by managing in block units, optical address information of an arbitrary radius at an arbitrary angle can be obtained. The correspondence table between the accurate optical address information and the corresponding magnetic track number is hereinafter referred to as an “address correspondence table”.

(4) The method of obtaining an accurate optical track radius has been described.

Next describes a method to adapt the magnetic track radius r _m and the optical track radius r _o.

位置 The opposing position shift between the optical head and the magnetic head adds to the shift at the time of manufacture to the shift at the time of operation. These cannot be unambiguously determined because of variations between products. For compatibility, it is important to clarify this correspondence.

There are two methods for this.

The first method is to provide no reference track on the magnetic surface of the recording medium.

時 に は When formatting the magnetic surface as shown in FIG. 79 (b), there is usually a displacement ΔL between the magnetic head 8 and the optical head 6. If formatting is performed in this state, a track shifted by ΔL is recorded. In this case, when recording and reproduction are performed on the same disk with the same drive under the same conditions, all operations are performed in a state shifted by ΔL, so that there is no problem.

In this case, since there is a backlash of the traverse actuator, it is necessary to always move the traverse in the same direction, for example, from the inner circumference to the outer circumference when tracking to a predetermined track.

In order to track the n-th track again, an offset distance of ΔL exists between the magnetic head 8 and the optical head 6 as shown in FIG. 79 (b) without applying an offset voltage during tracking. Therefore, when accessing the same optical track as at the time of recording, the same magnetic track as at the time of recording is tracked, so that data of the target magnetic track can be recorded and reproduced.

Next, when the formatted recording medium is applied to another drive, and when no offset voltage is applied, as shown in FIG. sometimes compared to offset distance △ L _o just shifted optical track and a magnetic track, the data in the wrong magnetic track will be recorded and reproduced. In order to avoid this, in the present invention, the traverse is controlled and moved so as to access the reference magnetic track 67 as shown in FIG.

Next, with the traverse fixed, the offset voltage ΔV is changed so that the optical head 6 accesses the optical track 65 containing the reference address signal, and ΔV _o is obtained. As a result, the correspondence between the optical track and the magnetic track can be established in the same manner as in the previous drive in which the formatting was performed.

By continuously applying the offset voltage ΔV _o to the actuator of the optical head 6, as shown in FIG. This effect can be obtained with a cheap configuration. In other words, if a specific optical address is accessed by applying an offset voltage, a specific magnetic address can be automatically accessed. Since this effect can be obtained with a configuration in which the lens position sensor is not provided in the optical head 6, the number of components can be reduced.

Next, a second method, that is, a method of recording a reference track on a magnetic recording surface in advance will be described. As shown in the drawing of the magnetic recording surface in FIG. 83, one magnetic track 67 on which a track for embedded servo is recorded is provided at the time of manufacturing the disk.

As shown on the left side of FIG. 83, the servo magnetic track 67s is recorded such that two magnetic tracks on which carriers having different frequencies f _a and f _b of A and B are recorded partially overlap each other.

The center magnetic head 8 tracks, the magnitude of f _a and f _b when reproduced are the same. However shifted when the output of the f _a inward, the output of f _b increases deviates outward, it is possible to control the magnetic head 8 to the center of the track to move the traverse.

The provision of the servo magnetic track slightly increases the cost of the medium, but has the effect of obtaining a more accurate value when calculating the offset voltage ΔV _o in FIG. Further, the eccentricity information of the optical track can be obtained more accurately.

As shown in the side views of the magnetic head of FIGS. 84 (a) and (b), the slider 41 of the magnetic head 8 is formed by molding with a soft material such as Teflon instead of metal. This has the effect that the destruction of the magnetic recording layer 3 by the slider 41 is reduced.

When magnetic recording is not performed as shown in the side views of the magnetic heads of FIGS. Touch the parts.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), when the slider 41 is tilted by an actuator so as to be parallel to the magnetic recording surface only when magnetic recording is performed, the magnetic head 8 contacts the magnetic recording layer 3 to enable magnetic recording. . In this case, there is an effect that wear of the magnetic head 8 is reduced when magnetic recording is not performed.

(Example 11)
Hereinafter, a recording / reproducing apparatus according to Embodiment 11 of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

The basic configuration is the same as the block diagram of FIG. 38 described in the sixth embodiment. The eleventh embodiment employs a system called a non-tracking system in which tracking servo control of a magnetic head is not performed.

The block diagram at the time of recording has a configuration like the block diagram of the recording circuit of FIG.

Recording is performed using two magnetic heads 8a and 8b having different azimuth angles as shown in the magnetic head diagrams of FIGS. 88 (a) and (b), using an A head 8a and a B head 8b, respectively. T _H of width a track pitch When T _P head of the magnetic track 67 as shown in FIG. 88 (b) has a relation of _{T P <T H <2T P} . Normally used conditions T _H = 1.5~2.0T _P. Therefore, when the n-th track is recorded, it is also recorded in the area of the (n + 1) -th track. Since the overlapping portion when the recording of the n + 1 track is overwrite recording, the recording track width of T _P is formed.

As shown in the enlarged view of the recording format in FIG. 89, when θ = 0 °, the two heads having different azimuth angles, the A head 8a and the B head 8b are switched and data is recorded while being overwritten alternately in a spiral manner. . Thus the head width T _H is smaller than the track width T _P is formed as shown in FIG. 88. Since the A tracks 67a and the B tracks 67b having different azimuth angles are alternately adjacent to each other, no crosstalk occurs between the tracks during reproduction. As shown in the recording format diagram of FIG. 90, a guard band 325 is provided between a plurality of adjacent track groups 326, so that recording and reproduction can be performed independently of each other.

As shown in the data structure diagram of FIG. 91, the data of each track such as A ₁ , B ₁ , and A ₂ is composed of a plurality of blocks 327, and a plurality of tracks are grouped into one track group. A guard band 325 is provided between each track group to enable rewriting on a track group basis. A plurality of blocks constituting one track are composed of a synchronization signal 328, an address 329, a parity 330, data 331, and an error detection signal 332.

Here, the operation at the time of recording will be described. The input data whose address is specified is input to the input circuit 21. In the case of the eleventh embodiment, during recording, data is rewritten using the track group 326 in FIG. 91 as one unit. That is, a plurality of tracks are simultaneously rewritten. Since each track group 326 is separated by the guard band 325 as shown in FIG. 90, recording and reproduction in this unit do not affect other track groups.

By the way, when the input data includes only a part of the information of the track group, the data is insufficient, so that the entire track group 326 cannot be rewritten. Therefore, when rewriting the n-th track group, the n-th track group is reproduced in advance, and all data is stored in the buffer memory 34 in the magnetic reproducing circuit 30. This data is sent to the input circuit 21 as an address and data at the time of writing, where the data of the address that matches the input data is replaced with the input data. In this case, the same data as the address of the input data in the buffer memory 34 may be replaced with the input data.

All data of the n-th track group 326n to be written is sent from the input circuit 21 to the magnetic recording circuit 29, modulated by the modulation circuit 334, and the data for the A head 8a and the data for the B head 8b are created by the separation circuit 333. .

As shown in a recording timing chart of FIG. 92 (a), B track by t = the A head 8a at t ₁ performs recording of the A track data 328a1, B head 8b at t = t ₂ the disc is rotated 360 ° The data 328b1 is recorded.

The switching timing signal between the A head and the B head is transmitted from the disk rotation angle detection unit 335 to the magnetic recording circuit 29 by detecting the rotation signal of the disk motor 17 or the 360 ° rotation of the optical address information from the optical reproduction circuit 38. . A non-signal portion 337 is provided at the end of each track data 328, and a signal guard band is provided so that the A track data 328a and the B track data 328b do not overlap.

(4) There is a guard band 325 on the disk, but it is necessary to set the recording start and end radii accurately so as not to erroneously record over the adjacent track group 326 beyond this. In the present invention, a method of obtaining a permanent absolute radius using a specific optical address as a reference point is used.

In FIG. 87, an optical address is read from the optical head 6 and the optical reproducing circuit 38. In this case, the optical head eccentricity correction method described with reference to FIGS. The eccentricity correction amount is calculated by the same method, stored in the eccentricity correction amount memory 336, read out when necessary, and the optical address is transmitted to the traverse actuator 23a by the traverse moving circuit 24a while the optical head 6 is decentered by the optical head drive circuit 25. Drive while referring to move the traverse. Thus, the magnetic track 67 can be accurately tracked by referring to the optical address of the optical track.

(4) Although an example has been described in which recording is performed using two magnetic heads 8a and 8b having different azimuth angles alternately, the recording time is long in this method.

As shown in FIG. 88 (c), the positions of the two heads in the radial direction are shifted by T _p , and the track A data and the track B data are simultaneously transmitted from the separation circuit 333 of FIG. by sending twice the pitch of T _p, as shown in the recording timing chart of FIG. 92 (b), it is possible to record one track group in half the time, there is an effect that it faster.

入 力 In this way, the input data is spirally recorded on the track.

と Taking a specific design example, even if the eccentricity of the optical track is ± 200 μm, the influence of the eccentricity correction means disappears and the eccentricity of chucking is within ± 25 μm, for example. The eccentricity of the rotation axis of the motor falls within ± several μm. In this case, by setting the width of the guard band to 50 μm or more, tracks can be recorded with a width within an error of ± several μm even if the track pitch is 10 μm. Thus, there is an effect that large-capacity recording can be performed by the non-tracking method.

ト ラ Traverse control for spiral recording will be described. In the recording format of FIG. 89, two points of a start optical address 320a of recording start and an end optical address 320e of recording end are set as reference points. In the case of FIG. 89, the traverse may be driven at the same pitch from the start point to the end point while the disk rotates four times. In the case of the present invention, a configuration is adopted in which a screw is turned by a rotary motor to feed a traverse. The rotation pulse from the rotation motor is obtained.

Traverse as the traverse gear rotation speed diagram in FIG. 97 is moved from the starting point optical address 320a to the optical address 320e of the end point, measure the rotational speed n _o of this period of the traverse drive gear. Since the disk has rotated four times, the system control unit 10 determines that n _o / 4Tr. p. The rotation speed of s is calculated, and a command to rotate the traverse drive gear at this rotation speed is issued. The magnetic head records data at an accurate track pitch. At the end of recording, since the magnetic head 8 is near the optical address 320e of the end point, it passes through the guard band and does not reach the start optical address 320x of the adjacent track group. The traverse drive gear rotation speed may be measured once each time the disk is changed. Also, it may be recorded on a disk. Further, by performing traverse control while counting the line numbers of the optical track, traverse feed can be performed more smoothly and accurately.

シ The cylindrical recording format diagram in FIG. 96 shows a case where coaxial tracks are used. In this case, the traverse is moved each time so that the optical head accesses the six points of the optical addresses 320a, 320b, 320c, 320d, 320e, and 320f of each track when recording each track. As a result, a cylindrical track is formed.

Further, as shown in the optical recording surface format diagram of FIG. 98, when there is a non-address area 346 without an optical address and no signal, access by the optical address is not possible. In this case, the reference radius and the disk rotation reference angle are obtained in the optical address area 347, and the line number of the optical track is counted, so that the predetermined relative position can be tracked also in the non-light address area 346. If a table of line numbers from the reference optical address point for each track is created and written in the magnetic TOC area 348, the target magnetic track can be accessed by other drives. The method of accessing with the line No. has a lower absolute position accuracy than the optical addressing method, but has the effect of increasing the access speed. It is desirable to use both of them, but it is good to use a line number counting method at the time of reproduction in terms of high-speed access. There are two types of drives, a high density type and a normal density type. High density type head width T _H is 1 / 2-1 / 3 of the normal type. The track pitch also becomes 1/2 to 1/3 T _po when the normal type is T _bo . In the case of non-tracking, the high-density type can reproduce normal-density type data, but not vice versa.

In order to achieve compatibility, a compatible track is provided when recording with a high-density type, and recording is performed at a track pitch of T _po as shown in the recording format diagram of FIG. As shown in the correspondence diagram between the optical recording surface and the magnetic recording surface in FIG. 100, when the data on the optical surface is divided into three programs 65a, 65b, and 65c, each magnetic recording data to be saved is approximately By setting the areas on the magnetic tracks 67a, 67b, 67c on the surface area, there is an effect that the movement amount of the traverse becomes small and the access time is shortened.

Next, the principle of regeneration will be described.

再生 The block diagram at the time of reproduction in FIG. 93 shows blocks related to the reproduction. Although it is almost the same as the block diagram of FIG. 87, only the magnetic reproducing unit 30 is different.

First, a reproduction command and a magnetic track No access command are sent from the system control unit 10 to the traverse control unit 338. As in the case of FIG. 87, the magnetic head accesses the target magnetic track No. accurately.

As shown in FIG. 89, the magnetic track 67 is spirally tracked, and the outputs of both the A head 8a and the B head 8b are simultaneously input to the magnetic reproducing unit 30, and are amplified by the head amplifiers 340a and 340b, respectively. Demodulation is performed by 341a and 341b, an error is checked by error check units 342a and 342b, and a normal signal is sent to AND circuits 344a and 344b only for normal data. The data is separated into addresses and data by a data separation unit, and only data having no error is sent to the buffer memory 34 by the AND circuits 344a and 344b, and each data is stored at a predetermined address. This data is output from the memory 34 based on a read clock from the system control unit 10. When the memory of the buffer memory 34 is about to overflow, an overflow signal is sent to the system control unit 10, and the system control unit 10 issues a command to the traverse control unit to reduce the traverse feed width. Alternatively, the speed of the motor 17 is reduced to lower the reproduction transfer rate. In this way, overflow can be prevented.

When the error of the error check unit 342 is large, an error signal is sent to the system control unit 10, and the system control unit 10 sends a track pitch reduction command to the traverse control circuit 24a. Thus, the track pitch of the playback is normal T _p from _{2 / 3T p, 1 / 2T} p, 1 / 3T p , and the data of the same address 1.5-fold, 2-fold, 3-fold error to be the number regeneration Rate goes down. If all the data of the next (n + 1) th track is collected before all the data of the nth track is collected in the buffer memory 34, the data of the nth track may not be reproduced. In this case, the system control unit 10 issues a reverse traverse command to the traverse control unit to return the traverse in the inner circumferential direction. Then, by reproducing the n-th track, the data of the n-th track can be reproduced.

Thus, there is an effect that data can be reliably reproduced without increasing the error rate.

Next, a description will be given of a non-tracking disk reproducing operation.

As shown in the data arrangement diagram of FIG. 94, data is recorded on the disk like recording data 345a, 345b, 345c, and 345d of track A. The data of track B, B ₁ , B ₂ , B ₃ , and B ₄ are also recorded, but cannot be reproduced by the A head because the azimuth angles are different.

Data of the B track is omitted for ease of explanation. When the recording data 345 of the A track is reproduced by the A head 8a at the same track pitch T _po as at the time of recording, the trajectory of the track is shifted from the disc by the chucking, so that the trajectory of the track is 349a, 349b, 349c, 349d. Become. Head width of the A head 8a T _H reproduces halves on both sides of the track for wider than T _po. The B track is of course not reproduced.

Therefore, the data reproduced without error among the reproduction signals of the track trajectories are A head reproduction data 350a, 350b, 350c, 350d, and 350e.

This data is sequentially sent to the buffer memory 34 shown in FIG. 93, and is recorded at a predetermined disk address, and the data of each track is completely reproduced like the memory data 351a and 351b.

Thus, the non-tracking A track data is reproduced. The B track is reproduced in the same manner.

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, since recording and reproduction can be performed at a small track pitch without applying the tracking servo of the magnetic head, there is an effect that a large capacity memory can be realized with a simple configuration. In particular, since the traverse control is performed using the address of the light surface, the accuracy of the traverse feed may be low, and the linear sensor in the radial direction may be omitted. When it is applied to an MDROM, it has a disadvantage that it can be rewritten only in a block unit of several KB to several KB, and in a CDROM without a cartridge, it can be rewritten only in a block unit of several hundred B to several KB. However, when focusing on home multimedia applications, there is no problem because low cost and large capacity are more important than high-speed accessibility. In exchange for this disadvantage, in the case of the non-tracking servo system, there is an effect that a drastic increase in capacity of one to two digits or more can be measured. Since the system does not use expensive track servos, this large capacity can be realized at low cost. This is because in the case of the non-tracking method, basically, accurate tracking is performed only with the accuracy of the bearing of the rotary motor. And this bearing precision is realized at low cost. In the case of an MD-ROM used in a cartridge, the recording wavelength can be set to 1 μm or less, so that a recording capacity of about 2 to 5 MB can be obtained. In the case of a bare CDROM, as described later in Examples 12 and 13, since a printing layer and a protective layer are provided on the magnetic layer, the recording wavelength is as long as 10 μm or more. For this reason, only a capacity of several + KB can be obtained in the ordinary method. However, by adopting the no-tracking method, a recording capacity of several KB to about 1 MB can be obtained. As described above, the eleventh embodiment has an effect that a large capacity can be achieved at low cost by using the current optical access mechanism of CD, CDROM, MD, and MDROM.

(Example 12)
Hereinafter, a recording and reproducing apparatus according to a twelfth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

The basic configuration is almost the same as the block diagram of FIG. 87 described in the embodiment.

The recording / reproducing apparatus of the twelfth embodiment uses a recording medium provided with a magnetic recording layer on the back surface of a ROM disk without a cartridge such as the CDROM described in the previous embodiment. Since the basic configuration operation of the recording / reproducing apparatus has already been described, it will be omitted, and this recording medium will be described in detail.

FIG. 101 is a perspective view of the recording medium 2. From below, there is a light transmitting layer 5, an optical recording layer 4, a magnetic recording layer 3, and a printing layer 43 thereon. On the printing area 44, a print 45 such as a label such as a CD title is printed. A hard protective layer 50 having a Mohs hardness of 5 or more may be provided. In the case of a recording medium such as a CD or CDROM having no cartridge and having an optical recording surface on one side, the printing area 44 can be provided on almost the entire surface on the opposite side. In the case of having both sides of an optical recording surface such as an LD or an LDROM, as shown in the perspective view of the recording medium in FIG. .

In this embodiment, a case where a CDROM is used as a recording medium will be described. Here, the configuration and manufacturing method of the recording medium will be described. In the manufacturing process diagram of the recording medium of FIG. When P = 1, a substrate 47 having a light transmitting portion 5 with a pit 46 is prepared. When P = 2, a light reflection film 48 of aluminum or the like is formed by vapor deposition, sputtering, or the like. At P = 3, a magnetic material such as barium ferrite having a high Hc of 1750 or 2750 Oe with an Hc of 1500 Oe or more is directly applied, or the material once applied to a base film is transferred together with an adhesive layer to form a magnetic recording layer 3. Create The recording medium of this embodiment is not protected by the cartridge. Therefore, it is necessary to use a high Hc magnetic material so that recorded data is not destroyed by a strong external magnetic field such as a magnet. It has been confirmed by a field test that in the case of a magnetic medium used in industry, a magnetic recording material having an Hc of 1750 Oe to 2750 Oe is used without any data destruction under normal use conditions. In home use, as can be seen from the diagram of the magnetic field strength of various products at home in FIG. 121, there is usually only a magnetic field of 1000 to 1200 Gauss at home. Therefore, Hc of the magnetic material of the magnetic recording layer 3 may be set to 1200 Oe or more. In this embodiment, the use of a material whose Hc is 1200 Oe or more prevents data destruction in daily life. In order to improve the reliability at the time of data recording, if the Hc of the magnetic material is increased to 2500 or more using barium ferrite or the like, the reliability is further improved. Barium ferrite is suitable for a CDROM type partial RAM disk in which low-cost mass production is indispensable because a randomizer process is unnecessary since a material can be produced by an inexpensive coating process at a low cost and is naturally spontaneously oriented. In this case, it is processed on a disk. What is important is that recording and reproduction are performed in the circumferential direction, and when magnetic orientation is performed in a specific direction such as a magnetic card or a magnetic tape, recording characteristics deteriorate. In order to prevent such orientation in a certain direction, a magnetic film is formed while applying an external magnetic field in various directions by a randomizer before the applied magnetic material hardens. As described above, in the case of barium ferrite, the effect that the randomizing step can be omitted is obtained. However, in the case of a CD or a CDROM, as shown in FIG. 101, it is required by the CD standard to print and display the title and contents of the medium as a label so that the consumer can visually recognize and discriminate the contents of the medium. ing. It is also important to print photographs and the like in color to enhance the appearance and enhance the commercial value. Magnetic materials are usually dark shades of brown or black and cannot be printed directly on them. When P = 4, a dark undercolor of the magnetic recording layer 3 is erased, and a printing base layer 43 of a highly reflective color such as white is formed with a thickness of several hundred nm to several μm by coating or the like in order to enable color printing. . While printing the underlying layer from the viewpoint of recording characteristics thinner is better, the thickness d ₂ of the print base layer 43 because too thin the color of the magnetic recording layer of the lower result in transmission is a certain degree of thickness required .

To prevent light transmission, a thickness of half or more of the wavelength is necessary. Therefore, a minimum wavelength of visible light λ = 0.4 μm and a thickness of λ / 2 = 0.2 μm or more are required. Therefore, d ₂ is required to have a thickness of 0.2 μm or more. By using d ₂ ≧ 0.2 μm, the shielding effect of the color of the magnetic material as a base for printing can be omitted. Conversely, d ₂ > 10 μm is not preferable because magnetic recording characteristics are significantly deteriorated due to space loss. Therefore, at least d ₂ ≦ 10 μm can be used for magnetic recording and reproduction. By setting 0.2 <d ₂ <10 μm, there is an effect that both the color blocking property and the magnetic recording property can be achieved. Experiments have shown that it is desirable to use a thickness of about 1 μm. Mixing a magnetic recording material with the printing underlayer 43 has the effect of substantially reducing space loss.

At P = 5, the printing 45 of the label as shown in FIG. 101 can be displayed by applying the printing ink 49 made of the dye. Since printing is performed on the white printing base layer 43, full-color printing is possible. Since the dye printing ink 49 is applied as shown at P = 5 in FIG. 103, the ink permeates the printing underlayer 43 at a depth of d ₃ , and the surface of the printing underlayer 43 does not have irregularities. For this reason, there is an effect that the head touch of the magnetic head is improved during the magnetic recording / reproducing and the drop of the print due to the running of the magnetic head is prevented. Thus, the recording medium is completed.

As the manufacturing method, the magnetic recording layer 3 with P = 3 and the printing ink 49 with P = 5 are manufactured using a gravure coating process as shown in the overall perspective view of the coating process in FIG. To explain this, the barium ferrite magnetic material coating material transferred from the coating material acupoint 352 to the coating material transfer roll 353 is selectively etched and remains in the CD-shaped etching portion 355 on the intaglio drum. Unnecessary coating materials are removed by the scriber 356. The CD-shaped coating material is transferred like a CD-shaped coating portion 358 onto a soft transfer roll 367 covered with a soft resin portion 361. The application section 358 is transferred and applied to the surface of the recording medium 2 such as a CD. Before drying, a magnetic field is applied by a random magnetic field generator 362 to obtain a random magnetization orientation. Since the soft transfer roll 367 is soft, it can be accurately applied to a hard object such as a CD. In this way, P = 3, P = 4, and P = 6 in FIG. 103 can be applied. However, the printing process at P = 5 may be an offset printing process because the film thickness is small. Also, as shown by P = 6 in FIG. 103, by coating a protective layer 50 made of a hard transparent material having a Mohs hardness of 5 or more with a thickness d4 on the recording medium, it is possible to prevent the printing ink from falling off and to prevent external scratches. In addition, since the magnetic recording layer 3 can be protected from wear caused by the magnetic head, the reliability of data can be improved.

As shown in the cross-sectional view of the coating transfer step in FIG. 106, the protective layer 50 is printed on the release film 359 by the steps of P = 6, 5, 4, and 3 in the reverse order to the steps described in FIG. The ink 49, the printing underlayer 43, and the magnetic recording layer 3 are applied, and are randomly oriented by a random magnetic field generator 362. This coating film is positioned on the surface of the base 4 on the pit 46 side, fixed after transfer by thermocompression bonding or the like, and the release film 359 is removed to complete a recording medium having the same structure as in the process P = 6 in FIG. I do. In the case of mass production, the transfer method increases the throughput and lowers the cost. Therefore, when producing tens of thousands of sheets like a CD, there is an effect that the production efficiency is increased. Suitable for this.

染料 In addition, although a dye was used at the time of printing in FIG. 103, a pigment printing ink 49 may be used as in step P = 5 in the application process diagram of FIG. 104. In this case, the thickness becomes d3. However, by providing the protective layer 50 made of a transparent material containing a lubricant satisfying d4> d3 when P = 6, the surface irregularities are reduced, and the head touch is improved by the lubricant. is there. Use of the pigment has an effect that wider color printing can be performed. In this case, after the process of P = 5, the surface irregularities can be eliminated by applying a hot press, and the product can be used as it is as a finished product. In this case, there is an effect that one step can be reduced because the protective layer 50 can be omitted.

(4) Next, a method for forming the magnetic shield layer will be described. Since there is a magnetic head on the side of the magnetic recording layer 3 of the recording medium and an optical head on the side of the light transmitting layer, electromagnetic noise from the actuator of the optical head leaks directly to the magnetic head, and the error rate at the time of reproducing a magnetic signal is reduced. Deteriorates. As shown in the diagram of the relative noise amount from the optical pickup to the magnetic head in FIG. 116, noise close to 50 dB is generated. By providing a magnetic shield in the recording medium 2 as a countermeasure, the influence of electromagnetic noise can be reduced. As shown in the manufacturing process diagram of the recording medium in FIG. 107, when P = 2, a magnetic shielding effect can be obtained by providing a high μ magnetic layer 69 such as permalloy having a high μ and a small Hc with a spac or the like. When it is desired to form the low Hc magnetic layer 69 in a short time or to increase the thickness in the manufacturing process, a permalloy foil having a thickness of several to several tens of μm may be inserted. It can be made thick even by plating. By making it thicker, the magnetic shielding effect becomes higher. In FIG. 103, the light reflection layer 48 is made of aluminum when P = 2. However, by forming a film of permalloy by sputtering, light reflection and the magnetic shield can be shared by one film. If you want to make permalloy thicker, it can be made at low cost by plating. This has a remarkable effect that the process of the reflection shield film is halved. In the transfer method step, in addition to the recording medium transfer step of FIG. 108, the adhesive layer 60a and a high μ magnetic layer 69 such as a permalloy foil of several μm to several tens μm are formed in addition to the steps of FIG. Thereby, a recording medium having a magnetic shielding effect can be created in the transfer process.

記録 As described above, a recording medium having a magnetic recording layer and an optical recording layer having a printing surface as shown in FIG. 101 can be produced. For this reason, there is an effect that a label similar to that of a conventional CD satisfying the CD standard can be provided and a magnetic recording surface can be added at the same time. As described above with reference to the magnetic field strength diagram of domestic products shown in FIG. 121, magnets that exist in daily life are mainly ferrite magnets that are inexpensive. And most magnets are not directly exposed. A magnetic field of only about 1000 Oe is generated even in the exposed or nearby area. Rare earth magnets, such as magnetic necklaces, are rarely used in daily life, but are small, so the possibility of magnetizing a barium ferrite magnetic recording material is low. Therefore, using a magnetic recording material having an Hc of 1200 Oe such as barium ferrite and a margin of 1500 Oe or more has the effect of preventing data destruction of the magnetic recording layer by a magnet existing in daily life. Further, since a magnetic shield layer made of a high μ magnetic material can be added, electromagnetic noise from an optical head during magnetic reproduction can be greatly reduced. The above manufacturing method basically uses an inexpensive method such as a gravure coating process and an inexpensive material, and is characterized by low cost. The RAM function and the printing surface can be improved without increasing the cost of a partial RAM disk such as a CD or CDROM. There is a remarkable effect that it can be obtained.

Here, a method of constructing a recording medium with an identifier indicating the presence or absence of a magnetic layer, that is, an HB identifier for short will be specifically described. As shown in FIG. 213, in the case of a CD, the data of the optical recording layer includes 98 frames having a data structure subjected to the EFM modulation and forms one block. If, for example, a code that sets POINT to “BO” in the Q bits of the subcode of the frame in the TOC is defined as the HB identification code 468a, the code “BO” is not used at present, and the conventional CD Or a CD-ROM and the HB medium with a magnetic layer of the present invention can be distinguished while maintaining complete compatibility. Moreover, since the TOC is recorded in the TOC area, the TOC can be identified at the time of reading the TOC for the first time, so that the HB medium can be identified during the start-up operation time.

FIG. 223 (a) shows a cross-sectional view of the HB medium, in which an aluminum deposition film 3 is provided on a transparent substrate 5. Then, as shown in FIG. 223 (b), an EFM-modulated signal is formed in this pit. The identification code 468a is recorded. As another method, the identification code 468a of “BO” is recorded in the POINT 470f of the TOC. This recording medium 2 has an effect that the presence or absence of a magnetic layer can be identified without changing the configuration.

(Example 13)
Hereinafter, a recording / reproducing apparatus according to Embodiment 13 of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

The basic configuration is similar to the block diagram of FIG. 87 described in the eleventh embodiment. The major difference is that as described in the twelfth embodiment, a magnetic material having a higher Hc than that of a normal magnetic disk is used, and a recording medium having a non-magnetic protective layer having a thickness of 1 μm or more provided on a magnetic recording layer is used. The point is that a magnetic head suitable for this recording medium is employed, and that measures are taken to prevent noise mixing due to a magnetic field from the optical head.

First, the configuration of the magnetic head will be described. The overall block diagram of the recording / reproducing apparatus shown in FIG. 110 is such that the magnetic head shown in the block diagram of FIG. Three heads including a magnetic head 8s are used. Since it is possible to reproduce while recording, an error check can be performed at the same time. The other operations are the same as those in FIG. 87, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, two magnetic heads 8a and 8b, which are features of the present embodiment, will be described with reference to the cross-sectional view of the magnetic head portion in FIG.

The optical head 6 and the magnetic heads 8a and 8b are arranged on both sides of the recording medium 2 so as to face each other. The optical head 6 accesses a desired specific track of the optical recording layer 4 on the recording medium 2. As a result, the magnetic heads 8a and 8b that move in conjunction with the optical head 6 travel on the magnetic track behind the optical track on the magnetic recording layer 3, and the magnetic recording is performed by the write magnetic head 8a and the reproduction is performed. Is performed by the magnetic head 8b. This recording / reproducing state will be described with reference to the magnetic track of FIG. 113 as viewed from above. Since the magnetic head 8a has a head gap 70a having a write track width La and a gap length Lgap, a magnetic track 67a having a width of La is recorded on the magnetic recording layer 3. A disk-shaped disk cleaning section 376 made of a soft material such as felt is provided on the magnetic track accessed by the magnetic head 8, and has an effect of removing dust and dirt from the disk and lowering the error rate during reproduction. In the OFF state of FIG. 111, neither the magnetic head 8 nor the disk cleaning unit 376 connected to the disk cleaning unit connection unit 380 by the spring is in contact with the recording medium 2. Next, when the magnetic head 8 is lowered, the disk cleaning unit 376 first lands on the recording medium 2 as in ON-A in the figure. The magnetic head section 8 does not contact the recording medium 2 due to the disk cleaning section connecting section 380 made of a spring. For this reason, in the ON-B state, the magnetic head 8 performs a soft landing on the recording medium 2 in two steps. Therefore, even if the magnetic head 8 is raised and lowered while the recording medium 2 is rotating, both the magnetic head 8 and the recording medium 2 are moved. There is an effect that damage is prevented. Further, as shown in the top view of FIG. 113, since the magnetic track 67a in the portion before the magnetic head 8 travels is cleaned, the effect that the error rate at the time of magnetic recording / reproduction is reduced is obtained. Also provided is a magnetic head cleaning unit 377 that is linked to the magnetic head lifting unit 21. The magnetic head cleaning unit 377 cleans the contact part of the magnetic head 8 at least once when the magnetic head 8 moves up and down when a disk is mounted. Is done. At this time, the disk of the disk cleaning unit 376 rotates by a slight angle and becomes a new surface, so that when the next disk is mounted, the disk is cleaned on the new surface. Next, since the reproducing head gap 70b of the magnetic head 8a is only Lb wide, only the part of the magnetic track 67a having the width of the reproducing track 67b is reproduced. In the case of the thirteenth embodiment, the head gap length Lgap of the magnetic head 8a is important. This is because the recording medium described in the twelfth embodiment has a print underlayer 43 and a print layer 49 protective layer 50 between the magnetic recording layer 3 and the magnetic heads 8a and 8b as described in FIG. The thicknesses are d2, d3, and d4, respectively. Therefore, a space loss of at least d = d2 + d3 + d4 always occurs. Assuming that the recording wavelength is λ, the space loss S is expressed as follows: S = 54.6 (d / λ) (dB) (1)

In addition, there is a relationship between the head gap Lgap and λ as expressed by the following equation (2): λ = 3 × Lgap

As a result of an experiment, it is preferable that the printing underlayer 43 has a thickness of 1 μm or more from the viewpoint of light shielding properties. The total thickness of the printed layer 49 and the protective layer 50 is 1 μm. Therefore, d is required to be 2 μm, and d = 2 μm.

From the above three conditional expressions, S = 54.6 × 2/3 L gap (dB)... (4)

This can be represented by the relationship diagram between the head gap and the space loss in FIG. If the space loss alone is not suppressed to at least 10 dB or less, sufficient recording / reproducing characteristics cannot be obtained. Therefore, it can be seen from the graph of FIG. 112 that it is necessary to set LGap to at least 3 μm in applications where a recording medium with a print layer is used.

In applications where higher density is prioritized over the beauty of printing, the capacity can be increased by using a recording medium without a print layer. And For this reason, space loss due to dust is inevitable. The worst is the space loss due to oil such as fingers and household garbage d = 1 μm It is necessary to consider equation (5). FIG. 112 shows the attenuation in this case. From FIG. 112, when a medium without a print layer is used, by setting the head gap to 1.5 μm or more, there is an effect that recording and reproduction can be performed without being affected by space loss.

(4) A magnetic head of a recording / reproducing apparatus for recording and reproducing data by rotating a magnetic disk for recording data such as a hard disk or a floppy disk has a slider portion and a head gap is usually 0.5 μm or less. When recording / reproducing the recording medium of the present invention using such a conventional magnetic disk magnetic head, sufficient recording / reproducing output cannot be obtained due to the presence of a protective layer or a printing layer. However, in the thirteenth embodiment, since the slider portion 41 is provided as shown in the magnetic head portion 8a of FIG. 111 and the head gap of the recording head 8a is at least 5 μm, the space loss as shown in the graph of FIG. Is 10 dB or less. Therefore, there is an effect that a sufficient recording / reproducing output can be obtained at the time of recording / reproducing.

In the thirteenth embodiment, a full-color label can be printed on the medium surface, and a recording medium having the same appearance as conventional CDs and CDROMs can be employed as shown in FIG. Therefore, even if the CD having the magnetic recording layer of the present invention is adopted, there is an effect that the consumer is not confused due to a difference in appearance and the basic function of the CD standard is not impaired. In particular, barium ferrite, which has a high Hc and a low material cost for the magnetic recording layer and does not require a random orientation process, has the effect of preventing magnetic data from being destroyed even under worst-case conditions under a magnetic field encountered in daily life and of being able to be manufactured at low cost even under the worst conditions. . As described above, the same handling as an existing CD can be performed, so that there is an effect that the CD is completely compatible.

Next, measures for suppressing magnetic field noise from the optical head to the magnetic head will be described. Noise is mixed into the reproducing magnetic head 8b due to electromagnetic noise from the optical head actuator 18, and the error rate deteriorates.

Therefore, as a first method, by using the recording medium 2 having the magnetic shield layer 69 described in the twelfth embodiment as shown in the cross-sectional view of the peripheral portion of the magnetic head in FIG. It is possible to prevent the error rate from deteriorating due to mixing in the head 8. In this case, when the optical head comes to the end of the disk, there is no magnetic shield outside the disk, so that the electromagnetic noise from the optical head actuator reaches the magnetic head 8. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 110, a magnetic shield 360 is provided around the disk on the recording / reproducing apparatus side to block electromagnetic noise outside the disk. As another method, as shown in FIG. 111, the actuator 18 of the optical head is surrounded by a magnetic shield 360 having a high μ such as permalloy or iron while leaving an opening 362 for a lens. As a result, the effect that the electromagnetic noise generated by the actuator of the optical head is less mixed into the magnetic head 8b and the mixed electromagnetic noise is greatly reduced can be obtained.

FIG. 116 shows the relationship between the distance between the magnetic head and the optical head and the mixed noise. The position of the magnetic head in a state where the optical head of the actually fabricated recording / reproducing apparatus is fixed and the focus control on the optical recording is controlled is shown. Is moved on a plane facing a recording medium, and the relative level of electromagnetic noise mixed into the magnetic head 8 from the optical head 6 is measured. As a second method, a method is employed in which this noise is detected and added to the reproduction signal in an opposite phase to reduce the noise component. As shown in the block diagram of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus shown in FIG. 111, a noise detection unit such as a magnetic head 8s for noise cancellation and a magnetic sensor is provided. The noise component is canceled by the addition using the ratio A. Noise can be canceled by optimizing the addition ratio A. The optimal addition ratio A ₀ causes running the magnetic track free from a magnetic recording signal, by changing the addition ratio so reproduced signal is minimized, can be obtained. A ₀ ^` can be calibrated in that way. This calibration work is performed at the stage when the noise mixture increases. In this case, the same effect can be obtained by using the point that the recording head 8a is not used during reproduction in FIG. 110 and using the recording head 8a as a mixed noise detection unit and inputting the signal of the recording head 8a to the noise canceller 378. . In this case, there is an effect that the canceling magnetic head 8s can be omitted.

(4) A configuration in which the noise canceling magnetic head 8s is provided will be described. As shown in the configuration diagram of the noise canceling magnetic head of FIG. 129, as shown in the side view of FIG. 129 (a), the noise canceling magnetic head 8s is attached to the magnetic heads 8a and 8b via the coupling portion 8t. ing. FIG. 129 (c) shows a view from above. FIG. 129 (b) is a side view as viewed from the track running direction. When the recording medium 2 comes into contact with the recording medium 2, a do space loss in height occurs. From the equation (1) in this embodiment, even if λ = 200 μm, if do is 200 μm or more, the reproduced signal from the magnetic recording layer becomes −60 dB, which is almost impossible to reproduce. On the other hand, as shown in the diagram of the mixed noise in FIG. 116, even if the magnetic head is raised by 0.2 mm in the upward direction, the mixed noise level hardly decreases within -1 dB. In this case, if the distance Ls between the noise canceling magnetic head 8s and the reproducing magnetic head 8b is, for example, λ = 200 μm, the original signal from the reproducing head can be prevented from being mixed by leaving an interval of λ / 5 or 40 μm or more. For this reason, there is a great effect that electromagnetic noise mixed into the reproducing magnetic head from the optical head driving unit can be almost completely suppressed. Further, instead of the canceling magnetic head 8s, a magnetic sensor 381 such as a Hall element or an MR element is provided on the slider 41 near the magnetic head 8 as shown in the configuration diagram of the magnetic sensor in FIG. Drive magnetic noise can be detected. By adding this signal to the magnetic reproduction signal in the opposite phase, the mixed noise can be greatly reduced. In this case, there is an effect that the size can be reduced as compared with the magnetic head detection method.

FIGS. 172 to 175 show a more specific structure of FIG. 129, and FIG. 172 (a) shows an example using a head having a structure in which a recording head 8a and a reproducing head 8b are shared by one gap. .

ヘ ッ ド When heads of exactly the same size are arranged as shown in FIGS.

FIGS. 175 (a) and 175 (b) show examples in which the width of the canceling head 8s is reduced to make it smaller. In this case, the size can be reduced.

FIGS. 172 (a) and (b) show an example in which a cancel magnetic head 8s having a uniform width is used. In particular, FIG. 172 (c) is provided with a groove 41a which also serves the groove d ₀ becomes the gap in the slider 41. The air contact surface of the slider 41 is lower than that of the head 8a, and the air pressure of the magnetic head 8a is lower. Therefore, there is an effect that the head and the media contact are improved. In this case, it is assumed that l ₂ > l ₁ .

FIG. 173 shows an example in which the head gap of the cancel head 8s shown in FIG. 171 is eliminated, and since the magnetic signal is not read even when the magnetic head is brought into contact with the magnetic surface, there is an effect that only noise can be picked up.

FIGS. 176 to 178 show the case where the coil 499 is used as the cancel head.

FIG. 176 (a) shows two coils 499 a and 499 b arranged in the groove of the magnetic head 8. A magnetic flux 85 of noise as shown in FIG. 175 (b) can be detected.

FIG. 177 (a) shows the arrangement of the coils 99a and 499b in parallel with the gap of the head, which is highly effective because noise in the magnetic field direction of the head can be detected.

FIG. 177 (b) is a block diagram of noise cancellation, in which the signals of 499a and 499b are amplified by the amplifiers 500a and 500c, mixed by the amplifier 500b, and input to the noise input unit of the noise canceller 378 of FIG.

FIG. 178 (a) shows an improvement in noise detection capability using four coils 499a and 499b parallel to the head cap and 499c and 499d perpendicular to the head cap.

ノ イ ズ By adjusting and mixing the outputs of the parallel coils 499a and 499b and the outputs of the vertical coils 499c and 499d as shown in the block diagram of FIG. 178 (b), a noise detection signal optimal for cancellation can be obtained.

に The spectrum distribution diagram of FIG. 179 shows the result of actually measuring the electromagnetic noise of the optical pickup with the noise canceller head attached. As is clear from the figure, noise generated at several KHz overlaps with the reproduction frequency region of the present invention using a wavelength of 100 microns, making reproduction difficult. However, the figure shows that the adoption of the cancel head reduces about 35 dB noise in this area. Therefore, there is an effect that the error rate at the time of reproduction is greatly improved.

と し て As a third method, as is clear from FIG. 116, if an interval of 10 mm is provided, 15 dB noise is reduced. Therefore, when the distance between the optical head and the magnetic head is set to 10 mm or more, there is an effect that noise is greatly reduced. In such a case, it is important to maintain the accuracy of the positional relationship between the optical head and the magnetic head. A configuration for realizing this will be described.

As shown in the cross-sectional view of the head traverse section in FIG. 117, the traverse shafts 363a and 363b of the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 rotate in the same direction by the traverse gears 367a, 367b and 367c by the rotation of the same traverse actuator 23. Since these are reverse-threaded, the optical head 6 moves leftward on the drawing as indicated by the arrow 51a, and the magnetic head 8 moves rightward and opposite to each other on the drawing in the direction of the arrow 51b. The respective heads are first adjusted in position as a result of hitting the position reference points 364a and 364b, the optical head 6 moves above the reference optical track 65a, and the magnetic head 8 moves above the reference magnetic track 67a. . In this way, the initial setting of both positions is performed, so that the accuracy of the positional relationship between the two during the movement is maintained. By performing this positioning at least once when a new recording medium 2 is mounted or when the power is turned on, the two simply move by the same distance. Therefore, when the optical head 8 accesses a specific optical track 65, the magnetic head 6 accurately accesses a specific magnetic track 67 located on the same radius as the optical track 65. Thereafter, when the optical head 6 is moved, the magnetic head 8 is also moved by the same amount. Therefore, as shown in the top view of the traverse in FIG. Go to. If the outermost, both heads on a track on the circumference of the radius L ₂ are. If the innermost, both heads on a track on the circumference of a radius L ₁ is moved. In this case, the distance between the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 becomes 2L _1, Taking this interval than 10 mm, mixed noise from the optical head to the magnetic head is reduced. In the case of a CD, since L ₁ = 23 mm, the distance between the two is 2L ₁ = 46 mm, and as is apparent from FIG. 116, there is a great effect that the mixed noise becomes 10 dB or less and the effect is almost eliminated. As shown in FIG. 117, when the recording medium 2 is mounted, it cannot be mounted as it is because the magnetic head 8 is provided. Therefore, the magnetic head 8 and the traverse portion are largely lifted by the elevating portion 21 of the magnetic head shown in FIG. At this time, the positional relationship between the two heads is out of order. At this time, the contact surface of the magnetic head 8 is cleaned by the magnetic head cleaning unit 377 as described above. Then, the magnetic head 8 and the traverse section are returned to the predetermined positions. When the magnetic head 8 and the traverse section are returned to their original positions, the precise relative positional relationship between the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 is shifted. Therefore, even if the magnetic head 8 is moved in conjunction with the optical head 6 as it is, a specific magnetic track 67 on the same radius as the optical track 65 cannot be accurately accessed. By performing the above-described positioning operation at least once when the recording medium is mounted, there is a great effect that the positional accuracy when the magnetic head 8 accesses a desired magnetic track 67 can be improved with a simple configuration. This is an important function for realizing consumer equipment that requires low cost.

As another configuration, as shown in a cross-sectional view of another traverse section in FIG. 120, the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 are connected by a flexible traverse connection section 366 such as a leaf spring and a connection section guide 375 for guiding the traverse connection section. As a result, the heads can be moved in an interlocked manner as indicated by an arrow 51, and the effect of moving both heads in an interlocked manner can be obtained as in the case of the traverse section described with reference to FIG. In this case, since the traverse connecting portion 366 is soft, the magnetic head 8 can be easily raised in the direction of the arrow 51a. For this reason, there is an additional effect that the magnetic head 8 can be more easily lifted by the magnetic head elevating unit when the recording medium 2 is mounted.

Or may be configured such that the distance of the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 in the arrangement as shown in cross-sectional view of the traverse of Figure 126 is always L ₀ Figure 117. In this case, the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 move in the same direction as shown by arrows 51a and 51b. In this case, since the interval between the magnetic head 8 and the optical head 6 can be made the longest, there is an effect that noise mixed into the magnetic head from the optical head is reduced. Although there is no great effect in the case of a CD, the radius is small as in the case of an MD disk, and the method described with reference to FIG.

In the description of the present embodiment, a case where the magnetic head and the optical head are arranged at an angle of 180 ° with respect to the center of the disk as shown in FIG. 117 has been described. May be arranged. In this case, if the condition that the heads are closest to each other by 10 mm or more when the heads are closest to each other is satisfied, the effect of reducing mixed noise can be obtained.

(4) Noise is reduced by combining one or more of the above three measures against mixed noise.

If the electromagnetic shield of the optical head 6 is sufficiently effective, the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 can be vertically opposed as shown in the cross-sectional view of the traverse section in FIG. Also in this case, by providing the position reference portions 364a and 364b, there is an effect that the positioning accuracy of both heads is improved. This face-to-face arrangement method has an effect that the size can be reduced because all components can be arranged on one side with respect to the center of the disk.

Next, the recording format will be described here. The rotation speed of the data optical disk is the same even if the radius of the optical head changes due to CAV (constant rotation speed). However, when applied to a CDROM, the rotation of the disk becomes CLV and the rotation speed differs depending on the radius of the track, but the linear speed is constant. In this case, a recording format such as a general floppy disk or hard disk cannot be used. In the present invention, as shown in the recording formats 370a, 370b, 370c, 370d, and 370e of the recording format diagram of FIG. You have set. A synchronization section 369, a track number section 371, a data section 372 having a different capacity for each track, and a CRC section 373 for error checking are provided at the beginning of the data. Even when the linear velocities are different, the synchronization section 369b at the next head is prevented from being accidentally erased during recording. With such a configuration, in the case of a CD, there is an effect that the recording capacity is increased by about 1.5 times as compared with the case where each track has the same capacity like a floppy disk. Further, since the magnetic head performs magnetic recording and reproduction using the rotation control of the CLV motor based on the signal of the CD optical head as it is, there is an effect that a motor control circuit dedicated to magnetic recording can be omitted.

Next, I will describe the physical format on the disk. There are two types of physical formats, a “normal mode” and a “variable track pitch mode”. As shown in the physical format diagram in the normal mode on the recording medium in FIG. 123, the magnetic tracks 67a, 67b, 67c, 67d are arranged on the back surface of each of the optical tracks 65a, 65b, 65c, 65d. Tracks are arranged at an interval track pitch Tpo.

Furthermore, the present invention employs a “variable angle” system. As shown in FIGS. 117 and 119, in the case of the present invention, there are various angles such as 0 °, 180 °, 45 °, 90 °, etc., in the relative angle between the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8. Normally, in a conventional rotary magnetic disk type recording / reproducing apparatus, the data synchronizing unit 369, that is, the Index 455, is arranged at a position at a certain angle when viewed from the center on the disk. However, in the case of the variable-angle index according to the present invention, as shown in FIG. 123, the angle of arrangement of the synchronization unit 369 at the data start point is defined as a specific MFS optical block of the optical recording unit of the CD as the index. By doing so, it can be arbitrarily selected at a pitch of 17.3 mm in the circumferential direction. In this case, if the MSF information of the optical frame of the index for each track is recorded as shown in FIG. 214, Index information can be obtained at the same time as tracking. When the Sync next to the MSF is used as an Index, recording can be started with an accuracy of 170.8 μm as shown in FIG. In this case, as shown in FIG. 123, the magnetic recording can be accurately started from the Sync 369 based on the Index, but the magnetic recording cannot always be accurately ended. If the processing is not completed correctly, the Sync 369 is overwritten by the last recording signal. In order to avoid this, the number of light pulses in one rotation may be determined. For this reason, first, the optical recording unit of the Index is rotated. Then, the light beam is returned one track to the original track on the way. Then, reproduction is performed again to the index optical address. If the number of light pulses during this period is recorded, one rotation can be made accurately. If the data thus measured is recorded in the magnetic recording section of the magnetic track-one optical address correspondence table in FIG. 214, that is, in track 0 or track 1, it is not necessary to measure the number of pulses again.

Thus, since the number of MSF blocks and the number of physical frames in one round are known, the magnetic recording is completed with a high accuracy of 173 μm, as described above, so that the Sync369 can be prevented from being destroyed and the gap 374 can be minimized. Therefore, there is an effect that the recording capacity increases.

In this case, in order to obtain synchronization, it is necessary to quickly obtain subcode data. In FIG. 211, after the optical reproduction signal is subjected to the EFM decoding, a subcode of a specific MSF is obtained from the subcode synchronization detection unit 456. 215 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 215. The Index detection unit 457, which has obtained the subcode from the subcode synchronization detection unit 456, compares the subcode with the subcode of the optical address of the specific magnetic track. 9b, data recording is started from the Sync of the block next to the Index address. In this case, since the fastest available subcode information is used, there is an effect that the cueing can be accurately performed with a small delay time.

In some cases, data at an optical address serving as an index may be destroyed, and in this case, magnetic recording on a track cannot be performed. To avoid this, as shown in FIG. 214, an error-free optical address following the optical address is defined, and the optical address MSF information is recorded in the magnetic track table of the magnetic recording unit, so that the track can be used again. There is a big effect that you can do it.

(4) By this, an effect is obtained that the means and circuit for detecting the absolute angle of the disk can be omitted. In addition, since the start of magnetic recording can be started from an arbitrary rotation angle portion, in the case of a CD, data recording can be started immediately after reading specific optical address information of an optical recording unit such as an index subcode. For this reason, at the time of reproduction, the reproduction of the head synchronous portion of the magnetic data is started immediately after reading the optical address information of the track, so that there is no loss time of the rotation waiting time at the time of recording or reproducing the magnetic data, and there is practically no loss time. A great effect that data access time is shortened is also obtained. This method is particularly effective when the same type of recording / reproducing device is used.

(5) Here, a method of accessing a magnetic track will be described. As shown in FIG. 213 of the thirteenth embodiment, the optical address information is recorded in the Q bit of the subcode in the form of minute, second, frame, that is, MSF. When accessing the optical track, it is necessary to access the MSF itself, but the magnetic track width is several hundred μm, which is two orders of magnitude larger than the optical track, and corresponds to several hundred optical track widths.

Therefore, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 221, first, recording / reproduction of a specific magnetic track is started in step 468a, and an optical address corresponding to the magnetic track is obtained from an optical address-magnetic track correspondence table in step 468b. In step 468c, the reference optical address M ₀ S ₀ F ₀ is obtained. Or magnetic reproduction checked in step 468D, calculates the upper limit value M ₂ S ₂ F ₂ and the lower limit value M ₁ S ₁ F ₁ search address range in step 468e, if the reproduction searches the optical address in step 468F, step When it is confirmed at 468 g that the value falls within the range between the upper limit value and the lower limit value, the magnetic data reproducing operation is started at step 468 h. If there is no error at step 468 j, the reproduction is completed. In step 468k, the search light address range is reduced, and magnetic reproduction is performed.

Returning to step 468d, if it is magnetic recording, it is checked at step 468m whether or not there is an optical index. If Yes, an optical address of a narrower range than step 468e, for example, ± 5 frames is set at step 468n. Is accessed, and a cue is performed based on the optical index mark in step 468r, magnetic recording is started in step 468s, and completed in step 468t.

Returning to step 468m, when there is no light index mark searches a specific optical address M ₀ S ₀ F ₀ at step 468U, was accessed at step 468V, in step 468w blocks of M ₀ S ₀ F ₀ following When the specific codes S ₀ and S ₁ of the EFM modulated signal recorded in the subcode areas of the first and second frames shown in FIG. To start recording, and is completed in step 468t.

By using the method of FIG. 221, when accessing a magnetic recording track, it is only necessary to search for a plurality of optical addresses in a range of several tens of frames before and after the optical address. The effect of greatly shortening the access time of the magnetic track is obtained.

{Circle around (2)} By making the search range of the optical address in the case of recording narrower than the search range in the case of reproduction by adopting ± 20 frames and ± 5 frames, for example, the effect that optical recording can be performed more reliably is obtained.

Next, the “variable track pitch mode” will be described. A general ROM disk such as a game machine is mounted, and at the time of starting the program, a TOC track is first read, a specific track in which a program is recorded, and a specific track in which data is recorded. This procedure is the same every time when starting up. For example, when a CAV optical disk is used, let's assume a case where a fixed track such as a first track 65b, a 1004 track, a 65c, a 2504 track 65d, and a 3604 track 65e is accessed as shown in FIG. When the hybrid disk of the present invention is used, if the magnetic information required at the time of rising is located in a place other than the magnetic track on the back side of the optical track accessed at the time of the rising, the apparatus may use an extra magnetic track in addition to the access of the optical track. Will be accessed. Accordingly, the initial rise is delayed accordingly. In addition, if the track pitches are equally spaced in the "normal mode", the probability that the center of the magnetic track comes behind the optical track is low. For this reason, it is necessary to access a magnetic track different from the optical track, and also in this case, the rising speed becomes slow. The "variable track pitch mode" of the present invention is characterized in that, for example, magnetic tracks 67b, 67c, 67d and 67e are defined behind the four optical tracks 65b, 65c, 65d and 65e which need to be read at the time of rising. There is. The track No. and the address information of the optical recording section serving as an Index corresponding to each track No., and in the case of a CD, subcode information are recorded in the TOC section of the optical recording section or the TOC section of the magnetic recording section. Next, if it is set to record data to be read at the time of startup on the magnetic track, for example, the number of items acquired, the tribute, the score, the personal name, etc. of the game at the end of the previous time, at the time of startup, at the same time as accessing the optical data, Even if the magnetic track on which the necessary information is recorded is not specially accessed, the magnetic track is automatically accessed at the time of start-up, and the magnetic data is read, so that there is no loss time and the start-up time is significantly shortened. . In this case, as shown in FIG. 124, the track pitches between the tracks are Tp1, Tp2, Tp3, and Tp4, and take random values. For this reason, the recording capacity is slightly reduced, but the use in which the rising speed is prioritized is effective.

The "variable pitch mode" and "variable angle mode" are also effective for music applications, for example, karaoke. When the present invention is applied to karaoke, it is possible to record and save individual environment setting data such as the pitch of each individual song that is easy to sing, the tempo of the song, the amount of echo, and each parameter of the DSP. This allows you to set a single time and simply insert a karaoke CD into the karaoke machine to automatically play the song with the appropriate pitch, tempo, and echo for each individual. The effect of being able to enjoy is obtained. In this case, a magnetic track on the back side of the optical tracks 65b, 65c, 65d, 65e at the beginning of each song is defined, and personal karaoke data on the song is recorded on the magnetic tracks 67b, 67c, 67d, 67e. Keep it. Then, when a karaoke song of the optical track 65c is selected, the individual karaoke setting data is recorded on the magnetic track 67c on the back side thereof, and a period of one rotation of the disk when the reproduction of the specific song is started. , The pitch, tempo, and echo of the song are set, and the music is output. As described above, even in music applications, the variable pitch mode has a great effect that both optical data and magnetic data can be quickly accessed. This is effective when used for setting the environment such as the DSP sound field for each piece of music in a portable music application.

場合 When the present invention is applied to a CDROM, if Hc is set to 17500e, a RAM capacity of about 32 kB can be obtained. Since the ROM capacity of the optical recording surface of a CDROM is 540 MB, there is a capacity difference of nearly 100,000 times. Actual CDROM products use 540 MB in full, and there is a few + MB free space even in the least case. In the present invention, a compression / expansion program for data compression / expansion and various reference tables for compression are recorded in the ROM using the free area of the ROM, and the data recorded in the RAM area is compressed. This method will be described with reference to the compression method diagram of FIG. In the case of a game, for example, information that is strongly correlated with the content of the game that is considered necessary in the course of a program such as a game is stored in the optical recording unit 4, for example, a reference for compression of a place name reference table 368 a or a person name reference table 368 b. The table is recorded in advance. Since the capacity of the free area of the ROM is large, various reference tables of information considered to be frequently used among words and numeral strings such as person names and place names can be prepared. For example, when the word “Washington” is recorded on the magnetic recording layer 3 which is a RAM area, an 80-bit area is consumed as it is. However, in the case of the present invention, referring to the lookup table 368a for compression, it can be seen that "Washington" is defined as a binary code of "10". In this case, the data of 80 bits is compressed into the 2-bit data of “10”. By recording this compressed data on the magnetic recording layer 3, it is possible to record with a capacity of 1/40. It is generally known that a lossless compression method can achieve 2-3 times compression. However, by using this compression method, data can be compressed 10 times or more if the application is limited. For example, the magnetic recording capacity of the aforementioned 32 kB CDROM of the present invention is substantially the same as that of the magnetic disk having a magnetic recording capacity of 320 kB. Is equivalent to As described above, in the case of the hybrid disk of the present invention, the physical ROM capacity is reduced by using the ROM area of the optical recording unit, but the effect is obtained that the actual logical RAM storage capacity can be significantly increased due to compression. is there. In FIG. 125, since the compression / expansion program is recorded in the ROM section of the optical recording section, there is an effect that the substantial capacity of the RAM area does not decrease. If there is enough room in the RAM area of the magnetic recording unit, the compression / decompression program may be recorded on the magnetic recording unit. Specifically, it can be realized by using the Hulfman optimal encoding method or the Ziv-Lempel data compression method. By creating a reference table and a Hash function in advance in the case of the Ziv-Lempel system and recording them in the optical recording unit, the recording data in the magnetic recording unit can be reduced.

Here, an example of a specific overall operation will be described with reference to the flowcharts of all the operations in FIGS. 127 and 128.

First, the disk is mounted in step 410 with the magnetic head lifted, and in step 411 the magnetic head is returned to the home position. In step 412, the optical head is moved to the TOC track, and in step 413, the optical data of the TOC is read. The first method is realized by using the Q ₁ to Q ₄ control bits of the bit subcodes CD data of FIG 213. When Q ₃ = 1, if it is defined that a magnetic recording layer is provided, the magnetic layer can be identified. Then, in FIG. 213, for example, the data tracks of the magnetic layer after the optical tracks, Q ₁ , Q ₂ , Q ₃ , Q ₄ = 0000, 1000, 0001, 1001, and 0100 are already used. Therefore, if Q ₁ , Q ₂ , Q ₃ , Q ₄ = 0, ₁ , ₁ , 0 are defined as magnetic data tracks, the format information of the magnetic tracks can be recorded in the TOC. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 214, the physical position of the CD of the optical recording unit serving as the Index, which is the start point of recording / reproducing of each magnetic track, is recorded. For example, in the case of the first track, if the optical head accesses the MSF, that is, a block of 3:15:55, the magnetic head accesses the first track. As shown in FIG. 213, the Index indicating the recording start position can obtain an accuracy of 17.3 mm using only the information of the MSF. To further increase the accuracy, an index signal can be obtained with an accuracy of 176 μm by specifying a specific frame of a specific MSF. Therefore, for example, if an Index is created by using a Sync signal of a block next to a specific MSF block and recording is started, recording and reproduction can be started at an accuracy of 176 μm. In this case, as described with reference to FIG. 123, since the indexes are not aligned at a certain angle due to CLV, the indexes of the respective tracks are different, but they cannot be used for actual recording and reproduction. By using the MSF information in this manner, an index can be obtained, so that it is not necessary to provide an index specially, so that there is an effect that the configuration is simplified. This data includes a flag indicating whether or not the optical disk has a magnetic recording section, address information such as a subcode number of a CD corresponding to a default position of each magnetic track of the magnetic data, and presence / absence of a variable pitch mode. . In step 414, the presence / absence of the flag of the magnetic recording layer is checked. If Yes, the flow proceeds to step 418. If No, the optical mark indicating the presence / absence of the magnetic recording layer on the magnetic recording surface or the like is read in step 415. If not, the flow jumps to step 417 of block 8, and no magnetic recording / reproduction is performed on this disk. In step 418, the magnetic recording / reproducing mode is entered, and the magnetic track initialization step 402 is entered. In step 419, the magnetic head is lowered to the medium surface. In step 420, TOC magnetic data is read. In step 421, the magnetic head is raised to prevent wear. In step 422, an error flag indicating an error state of the magnetic data is checked. In step 423a, if there is a flag, the flow proceeds to block 5. In block 427 for instructing cleaning of the magnetic disk surface in block 5, the optical disk is ejected in step 427a, a message "Clean the optical disk" is displayed on the display unit of the device in step 427b, and the process is stopped in step 427c. On the other hand, in step 424, it is checked whether or not the optical address correspondence table of each magnetic track is the default value recorded on the optical recording surface side. If NO, in step 426, a part of the magnetic Updates the contents of the track one optical address correspondence table and saves it in the internal memory of the main unit. If Yes, the process enters the playback block 403 of block 1.

In step 428, if there is a read command of the magnetic track, go to block 2; if it is, go to step 429; if not, go to block 2 if not in the variable track pitch mode. If so, set optical track group number n to 0 in step 430. I do. In step 431, n is set to n + 1. If n is the final value in step 432, the process jumps to step 438. If the final value is not reached, in step 433, the first optical track of the n-th optical track group is accessed. In step 434, if the default magnetic track is sufficient, the magnetic head is directly lowered to the medium surface in step 436, the magnetic data is read in step 437, the data is stored in the internal memory, and the process returns to step 431. On the other hand, if the optical address corresponding to the magnetic head cannot be the default value, an optical address other than the default value is accessed in step 435, and the magnetic data is read out in steps 436 and 437, and the process returns to step 431. In step 431, n is incremented by one, and if n reaches the final value in step 432, the reading of optical data and the reading of magnetic data are completed in step 438. Based on the data recorded in the section, the game scene that ended last time is reproduced. In step 439, the magnetic head is raised, and the flow proceeds to the internal “memory rewrite” block 405 of block 3.

Returning to step 429, if the mode is not the variable track pitch mode, the flow jumps to the normal track pitch mode 405 of the block 2. If it is not the normal track pitch mode in step 440, the process jumps to block 3; if yes, in step 411, an access command for the nth magnetic track is received, and in step 442, the nth magnetic track in the internal memory of the microcomputer 10 is received. After waiting for the optical address corresponding to the magnetic track, in step 443, immediately after accessing this optical address, the magnetic data is read in step 444, stored in the internal memory in step 445, and jumps to block 3. In the rewrite step 405 of the block 3, the presence or absence of a rewrite instruction is checked in a step 446. If No, the process jumps to the step 455. If Yes, it is checked in the step 447 whether it is the last storage instruction. Go to step 448. In step 448, it is checked whether the magnetic data to be rewritten exists in the internal memory of the main body. If "Yes", the process jumps to step 454, and only the internal memory is rewritten without performing magnetic recording. If "No", a specific optical track is accessed in step 449 by referring to the magnetic track one optical address correspondence table, the magnetic head is lowered in step 450, and magnetic data is read out in steps 451, 452, and 453, and stored in the internal memory. Then, the operation of raising the magnetic head is performed, and the information transferred to the internal memory in step 454 is rewritten.

In the last storage block 406 of block number 4, it is first checked in step 455 whether or not the instruction is the last storage instruction. If step 455 is Yes, in step 456, it is checked whether there is updated data in the magnetic data in the internal memory, and only the updated portion is extracted. If there is no update in step 457, the process goes to step 458 and the update is performed. If there is, the optical address of the corresponding magnetic track is accessed in step 459, the magnetic head is lowered in steps 460, 470 and 471, magnetic data is recorded immediately after the optical address is detected, and the recorded data is checked. If the error rate is high in step 472, the flow jumps to the magnetic head cleaning block 408 of block 7, the magnetic head is raised in steps 481 and 482, the magnetic head is cleaned by the head cleaning unit, and recording is performed again in step 483. The error rate is checked. If the error rate is OK, the process proceeds to block 1;

Returning to step 472, if the error rate is low, it is checked in step 473 whether recording has been completed. If "N0", the process returns to step 470. If yes, the magnetic head is raised in step 474. Proceed to the end block of block 6, and if not finished, return to block 1.

At the end step 407 of this block 6, the magnetic head is raised at step 476, and the magnetic head is cleaned by the magnetic head cleaning unit at 477. If there is an eject command at step 478, the optical disk is ejected at step 479 and ejected. If not, the process stops at step 480. The recording / reproducing apparatus according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention operates according to the above flowchart.

(4) The mixed noise is reduced even if a band filter having the same band as the frequency distribution of the reproduction signal of the magnetic head is added to the drive circuit of the actuator 18. Also, after the magnetic track is accessed, the drive current of the actuator of the optical head 6 is turned off, reproduction is performed by the magnetic head 8b, and the drive of the actuator is started at the same time as the reproduction is completed, thereby reducing the electromagnetic noise.

Existing CDs often have printing ink applied thickly on the back surface by screen printing or the like, and have irregularities of several tens of μm. When the magnetic head 8 is brought into contact with such a CD, there is a possibility that the printing ink in the uneven portion may fall off and be damaged. As shown in the ON state of the cross-sectional view when the recording medium is inserted in FIG. 115, when the recording medium 2 having the magnetic shield layer 69 is inserted, there is no magnetic shield layer 69 as shown in the OFF state figure. Electromagnetic noise from the actuator of the optical head 6 is significantly reduced as compared with the case where the recording medium 2 is inserted. This noise is output from the magnetic head reproducing circuit 30 and can be easily detected. That is, the recording medium of the present invention can be discriminated from a conventional recording medium such as a CD without the magnetic head 8 being in contact with the magnetic recording layer 3. Then, the magnetic head 8 is brought into contact with the recording surface only when the recording medium having the magnetic recording layer according to the present invention is inserted, thereby bringing the magnetic head into contact with the back surface of the recording medium having no magnetic recording layer, such as a CD or LD. Therefore, there is an effect that the printed matter and the optical recording surface on the back surface can be prevented from being damaged by the magnetic head. As another method, in FIG. 111, a discrimination code indicating that the magnetic recording layer of the medium exists in the TOC portion of the optical recording portion of the CD or in the optical track portion near the TOC portion is recorded in advance, and first, the magnetic head 8 is turned on. The optical TOC is read without contacting the medium, and the magnetic head 8 is lowered to the surface of the medium only when the magnetic layer discrimination code is detected. According to this method, when the existing CD is inserted, the magnetic head 8 does not come into contact with either the optical recording side or the printing surface side of the medium, so that the existing CD is prevented from being damaged. A specific optical mark may be provided on the print surface of the optical disk, and only when there is a mark, it may be determined that there is a magnetic recording layer.

(Example 14)
A fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings.

FIG. 134 is a block diagram of a recording and reproducing apparatus according to Embodiment 14 of the present invention.

In this embodiment, recording or reproduction of the magnetic recording unit 3 is performed by performing modulation or demodulation based on the optical clock signal 382 of the optical recording / reproduction signal on the optical recording surface of the recording medium 2. Since the basic operation is the same as that of FIG. 110, a detailed description of the entire operation is omitted.

In FIG. 134, in the clock recovery circuit 38a in the optical recovery circuit, the optical clock 382 is reproduced from the optical reproduction signal. The optical clock 382 is frequency-divided, and a magnetic clock signal 383 shown in FIGS. 134 and 135 is generated in the clock circuit 29 a in the magnetic recording circuit 29, and serves as a clock at the time of modulation by the modulation circuit 334. FIG. 216 illustrates this state in detail. The optical clock of the clock regeneration unit 38a of the optical regeneration circuit is 4.3 MHZ. This signal is dropped by a frequency divider 457 into a modulation clock signal of the MFM modulator 334 of the present invention of 15 to 30 KHZ, and magnetic recording is performed. As described above, index search is performed by the index detection unit 457 detecting an optical address. The rotation control of the motor in this case is performed based on the optical signal. As shown in the time chart of FIG. 218, magnetic recording is started with a periodic signal after the light Index.

At the time of reproducing the magnetic signal, the magnetic clock signal 383 is reproduced by the clock circuit 30a of the magnetic reproducing circuit 30 and becomes a clock at the time of demodulation of the demodulation unit 30a. The operation at the time of magnetic reproduction will be described in detail with reference to the block diagram of FIG. In this case, after reproducing the index optical address, the power supply of the actuator of the optical pickup 6 is turned off as shown in FIG. 218 (d), the magnetic reproduction is turned on after the electromagnetic noise disappears, and the data is read based on the magnetic recording signal. Is demodulated and the rotation of the motor is controlled. The reproduction signal from the magnetic head 8 is shaped by the waveform shaping unit 466, and the clock reproduction unit 467 reproduces an approximate reproduction clock and sends it to the pseudo magnetic synchronization signal generator 462. The magnetic synchronous clock signal is reproduced in the magnetic synchronous signal detecting section 459, demodulated into a digital signal by the MFM demodulator 30b, corrected in the error correcting section 36, and output as magnetic reproduced data. Since the magnetic reproduction signal is obtained by dividing the optical reproduction signal by a constant frequency division ratio, when switching from the optical reproduction signal to the magnetic reproduction signal, the PLL 459a of the magnetic synchronization signal detector 459 switches from light to magnetism. Since the signal obtained by dividing the frequency of the optical reproduction clock until just before is sent as reference information, the pull-in center frequency is set near this. Therefore, when switching from light to magnetism, it is pulled in by the magnetic reproduction clock PLL in a short time. By dividing the optical reproduction clock to generate a magnetic recording clock and performing magnetic recording, it is possible to switch from the optical reproduction clock to the magnetic reproduction clock in a short time even if the optical head 6 is turned off during magnetic signal reproduction. effective. When the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 run on the same circumference or on different circumferences, a fixed frequency division ratio may be used when the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 run, but when running on a different circumference without being fixed. Is calculated by calculating the radii r _M and r _O and calculating the frequency division ratio.

Next, a rotation control method will be described. The rotation control at the time of the optical reproduction is performed by the shortest / longest pulse detection unit 460 of the motor rotation control unit 26 of FIG. 217, the approximate optical synchronization signal is generated by the pseudo optical synchronization signal generator 461, and the motor control unit 26a is controlled by the motor control unit 26a. The rotation number 17 is fed to a substantially prescribed rotation number and rotated at the rotation number. At this time, the changeover switch 465 is at the position B. When the optical synchronization signal detector 465 is synchronized, a switch command is sent to the changeover switch 465 and the switch is switched from B to A. Then, at t = t ₂ in the time chart of FIG. Immediately after the switching, the MFM period T of the magnetic reproduction signal is measured by the waveform shaping unit 466, so that a magnetic synchronization signal of approximately 15 KHz or 30 KHz can be obtained in the case of the present invention. This signal is sent to the switch 465 by the frequency divider / multiplier 464 through the pseudo magnetic synchronization signal generator 462 so as to match the optical rotation synchronization signal with the clock frequency. Immediately after switching from light to magnetism, the changeover switch 465 switches from A to C, and rough rotation control is performed. After that, when the PLL 459a of the magnetic synchronization signal detection unit 459 is locked, the changeover switch is switched from C to D, and accurate rotation control is performed by the magnetic synchronization signal. Thus, at time t = t _{3 in} the timing chart of FIG. 218, the magnetic reproduction signal is synchronized with the reproduction clock, so that the magnetic data is continuously demodulated.

When an error occurs due to a scratch on the medium surface at t = t _{4 and} continues for a certain period of time te, at t = t ₅ , the magnetic reproduction is turned off, the optical reproduction is turned on, and the rotation by the optical reproduction signal is performed during the time t _R. Control and stabilize motor rotation.

When the period of t _R has elapsed, the optical reproduction is turned off and the magnetic reproduction is turned on at t = t ₇ . Since the error has been completed, the transition of the rotation control from light to magnetism is completed in a short time. At t = t ₈ , since the magnetic recording synchronization signal is reproduced, Data 5 is reliably reproduced. In this way, even if there is an error due to a scratch on the medium, the error can be recovered in a short time, and the data error will not be a place name. In this way, magnetic reproduction is performed while switching time-division between rotation control based on optical reproduction and signal and rotation control based on a magnetic reproduction signal, so that a magnetic signal can be reproduced stably without being affected by electromagnetic noise from an optical pickup at the time of optical reproduction. There is an effect that it becomes possible. Even when the magnetic head 8 and the optical head 6 are arranged at a distance of 1 cm or more, magnetic reproduction can be performed using the methods shown in FIGS. 217 and 218. In this case, optical reproduction and magnetic reproduction can be performed simultaneously.
The motor 17 rotates at the synchronized rotation speed.

回 転 As shown in FIG. 135, the rotation speed ω of the recording medium 2 fluctuates greatly due to uneven rotation of the motor called wow and flutter. When the magnetic recording clock is fixed, the magnetic recording signal recording wavelength λ on the recording medium 2 fluctuates variously even on the same track due to the above fluctuation. As shown in FIG. 135 of the present invention, a magnetic clock 383 is generated from the optical reproduction clock 382 by frequency division and the like, and magnetic recording is performed, so that a magnetic recording signal having an accurate period is recorded on the recording medium 2. Can be recorded. Therefore, there is an effect that reliable recording can be performed at the shortest recording wavelength. Further, since the recording signal can be arranged accurately in one track of the recording section for recording in one rotation, the guard gap section 374 for preventing the duplicate recording described in FIG. 123 can be set to a minimum. Even when reproducing the magnetic signal, the demodulated clock can be accurately reproduced by dividing the frequency of the optical clock signal as shown in FIG. Therefore, the range of the demodulation determination window time 385 for reproduction can be set narrow. This has the effect of increasing the data discrimination ability and improving the error rate.

Further, the recording capacity can be increased twice or three times by using this optical recording / reproducing clock. In normal binary recording, only one bit can be recorded in one symbol as shown in Data1 in FIG. However, as shown in reproduce2 in FIG. 132, the time width modulation, that is, PWM, of the magnetic recording signal 384 can be applied using the accurate time Top of the optical clock signal 382. By modulating the waveform of one symbol by width, four values of 00, 01, 10, and 11, that is, 2 bits are allocated to the four time widths of the magnetic recording signals 384a, 384b, 384c, and 384d, thereby forming one symbol. Since the number of bits increases from 1 bit to 2 bits, the recording data amount can be increased. In this case, if recording is performed at an equal period To as shown by the signal 384d, λ / 2 becomes t ₃ ′ −t ₃ = To−dT as shown in the drawing, and is shorter than the shortest recording wavelength, that is, the shortest recording period Tmin. You will not be able to record. Therefore, in the case of the magnetic recording signal 384d, the magnetic clock is shifted by dT with t = t ₃ as a new starting point. Then, t ₄ = t ₃ ′ dT time becomes a discrimination window 384 for discriminating 00 of Data2. In the case of pulses of t ₅ , t ₆ , and t ₇ , data of 01, 10, 11, and 2 bits are demodulated, respectively. You.

Thus, in the case of binary recording such as NRZ, only one bit can be recorded per symbol, but two bits can be recorded according to the present invention. If the modulation width of the pulse width modulation is set to 8 types, 3 bits per symbol is obtained, and if the modulation width is set to 16 types, 4 bits per symbol is obtained. This is because the wavelength of optical recording is 1 μm or less, whereas the wavelength of magnetic recording of the present invention is 10 μm to 100 μm due to a large space loss, so that there is a wavelength difference of several tens to 100 times. Therefore, there is an effect that the pulse interval of the magnetic recording signal can be measured with a resolution of several tenths to one hundredth of the wavelength of the magnetic recording signal using the clock signal of the optical signal. From this, the recording capacity is theoretically several tens to 100 times larger than the recording capacity of binary recording due to the combination of the PWM and the optical signal clock. Actually, a recording capacity several to several tens times can be obtained due to waveform distortion of magnetic recording and the like.

Thus, the first method has an effect that recording can be always performed at a constant recording wavelength using the accurate optical recording clock signal recorded on the CDROM as a reference clock signal. In the second method, the recording capacity can be increased several times to several tens times by performing PWM (pulse width modulation) using the optical recording clock signal as a reference signal.

Next, a method of detecting the area of the magnetic recording section in advance to prevent the destruction of the magnetic head and the like will be described in more detail. The area of the magnetic recording section of the recording medium 2 of the present invention differs depending on the application. Since a large-capacity recording capacity is required for a game CDROM or a personal computer CDROM, a recording area of each track is set on the entire surface of the recording medium 2. On the other hand, the amount of information required to record information such as the title and order of songs on the music CD and the copy protection code information may be about several hundreds of B. In this case, since the recording area of one track to several tracks is sufficient, the remaining portion of the CD excluding the magnetic track portion can be printed on the printing surface side with many irregularities such as screen printing. Also, one magnetic track can be provided on the inner or outer peripheral portion on the optical recording surface side. In the case of one track, as shown in FIGS. 84 (a) and 84 (b), a recording material can be added to a read-only disc by simply adding a lifting motor 21, a lifting circuit 22, a magnetic recording / reproducing block 9 and a magnetic head 8. There is an effect that the configuration is simplified and the cost is reduced. In the case of the one-track system, the recording capacity is reduced when the inner track is used. As shown by 67f in FIG. 124, when recording is performed on only one of the outermost magnetic tracks 67f and used for a CD, a capacity of 2 KB can be obtained at a wavelength of 40 μm even with one track. In this case, since an access mechanism to the track is not required, the configuration is simplified and the size is reduced.

In this case, when the CD is loaded, the rotary motor 17 is driven by the clock of the TOC at the same time as the TOC of the optical track 64a shown in FIG. Since the radius of the TOC of the CD is constant, the CD rotates at a low speed. Magnetic recording and reproduction are performed in this state. The index signal and the synchronization signal for magnetic recording are read from the optical track 65. At this time, as shown in FIG. 84, if information indicating the existence of the magnetic recording layer 3 is contained in the optical track 65 in the TOC portion or in the vicinity of the TOC, the optical recording block 7 detects this information and moves the head up and down. By driving the motor 21, the magnetic head 8 is brought into contact with the magnetic recording layer 3 as shown in FIG. 84 (b) to reproduce a magnetic recording signal.

(4) Reproduced data is temporarily stored in the memory section 34 of the recording / reproducing apparatus 1, and is updated using this data to reduce the actual number of times of magnetic recording / reproducing and reduce abrasion.

よ う As shown in FIG. 84, the optical track 65a of the TOC and the outermost magnetic track 67f in the case of one track are simultaneously recorded and reproduced, so that the physical distance is close to 3 cm. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 116, the mixing of electromagnetic noise generated by the optical head 6 into the magnetic head 8 is reduced by 34 dB. Therefore, there is an effect that the mixed noise is greatly reduced.

(1) In the case of the one-track system, the magnetic recording layer 3 may be provided on the surface on the optical recording side because the outer peripheral portion is used. In this case, as shown in the magnetic recording layer 3a and the magnetic head 8a indicated by the dotted line in FIG. At the same time, there is an effect that the structure is simplified because it is not necessary to provide the upper pig.

Also, by forming the magnetic recording layer 3a of FIG. 131 on the transparent substrate 5 side by a thick film method such as screen printing, a thickness of several tens μm to several hundred μm, that is, a height is generated. Due to this height, the magnetic head 8a contacts only the magnetic recording layer 3a and does not contact the transparent substrate 5. For this reason, there is also an effect that the transparent substrate 5 is not damaged and does not hinder optical recording and reproduction. In this case, since the magnetic recording unit is provided, the capacity of the optical recording unit is reduced accordingly. Further, as shown in the left end of FIG. 131, the magnetic head 8a is fixed by separating the magnetic head 8a by more than 0.2 mm from the CD2, and the rubber roller 21d is pressed in the direction of the arrow 51 by the elevating part 21b attached to the upper pig 38a or the like. The CD curves, and the magnetic recording unit 3b contacts the magnetic head 8a. In this case, since pressure is applied, even if there is dust, there is an effect that contact is made and magnetic recording characteristics are improved.

In this case, the CD can be obtained by applying a magnetic recording material to the outermost peripheral portion on the transparent substrate 5 side by screen printing as shown in the lower right diagram of FIG. Actually, it is obtained by printing the CD upside down in a conventional CD screen printing process.

(4) A significant effect is obtained that no capital investment is required because the existing CD production line can be used. In this case, when the magnetic head comes into contact with a printing area having a lot of irregularities like a screen printing of a printing part or a transparent substrate part on an optical recording surface side, both are damaged. To avoid this damage, an optical mark 387 is provided on the magnetic recording surface side of the recording medium 2 as shown in the cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording device in FIG. This optical mark may be provided on the opposite surface. The optical mark 387 has optical data such as a bar code printed on a circumference indicating the size of the magnetic recording area. The optical sensor 386 provided on the magnetic head 8 side can read data such as a barcode of the optical mark 387. Reproduction of the barcode data can be easily performed by a conventional method using the light detection unit 386 combining the LED and the light sensor. Although the optical mark portion 387 may be provided on the inner periphery of the TOC portion of the CD in the drawing, by providing the optical mark portion 387 on the inner periphery of the TOC portion, there is an effect that sliding scratches and contamination by the magnetic head 8 can be prevented.

As shown in FIGS. 131 (b) and 145 (a), the barcode of the optical mark 387 includes information indicating the radial area (r = lm) of the magnetic recording layer of the CD and the value of Hc of the magnetic recording material. Information for copy guard or copy guard, and a disc ID No. different for each CD. Etc. are recorded. In this way, since the optical mark 387 can be identified by reading it in advance, it is possible to prevent the magnetic head 8 from contacting the recording medium 2 other than the area of the magnetic recording layer. Therefore, there is an effect that the destruction of the magnetic head as described above can be prevented.

Next, another configuration of the optical mark will be described. In the case of a CD, an optical recording unit is not usually provided on the inner periphery of the TOC. A light-transmitting portion 388 without an optical recording layer is provided in the region without the optical recording portion as shown in FIG. Then, the back side of the optical mark 387 can be seen from the optical head 6 side via the light transmitting portion 388. By printing an optical mark such as a bar code on the recording medium side of the optical mark 387, the optical mark 387 can be read by the optical head 6. This method has an effect that the optical sensor 386 can be omitted. As another method of reading, an optical sensor 386 can be provided on the optical head 6 side. In this case, since the optical sensor 386 can be provided on the fixed portion side in the upper cover opening / closing type CD player as shown in FIG. 131, there is an effect that the wiring is simplified.

The information of the optical mark 387 may be reflected light read by the optical head 6 or transmitted light may be read by the optical sensor 386. Also, by sharing the optical sensor 386 with a conventional optical sensor that detects the presence or absence of a CD, the number of components can be reduced. An optical mark can be formed at the time of manufacturing an optical recording film by intermittently providing an optical recording layer formed by vapor deposition of aluminum or the like and forming the optical recording layer in a circular bar code shape. In this case, there is an effect that the manufacturing process of the optical mark becomes unnecessary. As shown in FIGS. 131 (b) and 144 (a), a CD manufacturing process diagram and a CD top view of FIG. 145 (a), a magnetic material is applied in a single step of applying a magnetic material at the time of manufacturing the magnetic recording layer 3. By coating the recording area 398, the print 45, and the optical mark 387 twice with the screen printing material 399, three films can be formed in one step. The printing surface of the CD is as shown in FIG. In particular, since the high Hc material is black, the contrast of the title print 45 is increased. By screen printing, the recording medium 2 of the present invention can be imagined simply by changing the printing ink of the conventional CD production line to a high Hc magnetic material ink, so that the cost is almost the same as the existing CD, and there is no capital investment. Thus, there is a great effect that a CD with RAM can be obtained.

バ ー As shown in FIG. 145 (a), Data “204312001” can be read from the barcode 387a. By printing different Data for each disc (with the screen printing machine 399), the ID No. is printed on the CD. Can be printed. If the CD duplication prevention screen printer 399, which can protect the copy by recording the key unlocking program on the optical recording unit or the magnetic recording unit of the CD by using this, cannot change the print content for each sheet, FIG. As shown in FIG. 144A, a bar code 387a and, in some cases, a numeral 387b indicating a disk ID are printed by the circumferential bar code printing machine 400 in the process described with reference to FIG. In this case, ordinary ink is sufficient and the printing surface is as shown in FIG. 145 (b). In this case, the user visually checks the disc ID NO. There is an effect that can be read. Further, as shown in FIG. 145 (c), the barcode portion 387a stores the ID No. as an OCR character. By printing the numeral 387b of the disc ID No. 3 in both the light detection section and the user's eyes. Can be confirmed. This has the effect. As shown by the dotted line on the right side of FIG. 144 (a), the second printing press 399a provides a high Hc magnetic recording area 401 of Hc higher than the magnetic recording unit 398 such as 4000 Oe. This area can be reproduced by an ordinary recording / reproducing apparatus, but cannot be recorded. For this reason, the disc ID No. And encryption. Then, since a special process is required, there is an effect that duplication by an illegal trader becomes more difficult. Further, as shown in FIG. 146 (a), a space 402a is provided in the optical disc 2, magnetic powder 402 such as iron powder is put therein, and a magnetic part 403 having Hc such as iron is provided on the upper part. Then, when it is not magnetized, the magnetic powder 402 does not adhere to the magnetic part 403 as shown in FIG. However, when magnetized by the multi-channel magnetic head, the magnetic powder 402 is adsorbed as shown in FIG. When the OCR character described in FIG. 145 (c) is recorded, the user can visually recognize the OCR character from the direction of the arrow 51a. On the other hand, the magnetic head 8 has the ID No. Etc. can be read. By using this method, it is not necessary to change the ID of each sheet and print in the process of a disk. ID No. in OCR shape at factory And the like need only be magnetically recorded for each sheet, so that the conventional process can be used and there is an effect that new capital investment is not required.

As shown in the lower right part of FIG. 98, the magnetic recording layer 3 is provided on the outer peripheral portion on the transparent substrate 5 side to record a fraud-preventive copy signal at a factory, since a conventional CDROM caddy can be used. There is an effect that can be removed. In the case of an MD playback-only disc, the shutter has a window on only one side, but the present invention can be applied to a single-sided window shutter by providing a magnetic layer on the transparent substrate side.

ＩＤ Now, this ID No. The following describes the copy protection method using the key and the key release method for each software. First, it is assumed that a CD contains 100 logically locked programs. The user gives ID No. to the software production company. And pay the fee, and ID No. Key No. corresponding to Get notified. The key No. for this tenth program Is recorded in the magnetic recording portion TOC of the CD or the like. Then, when the tenth program of this CD is reproduced next time, the key information recorded on the magnetic recording layer and the ID No. recorded on the optical mark part are read. Is input to the use permission program, the use of the program is permitted if the key is correct, and the program can be used without any procedure every time. In the case of a conventional CD or CDROM, ID No. It is necessary for the user to enter the key every time, but in the case of the present invention, once the key is entered, the program can be used without inputting the key. Furthermore, ID No. Cannot be rewritten and is different for each disk. Therefore, even if key information of one personal disk is input to another personal disk, the key is not released. Therefore, there is an effect that the use of the CDROM software without paying the software fee can be prevented.

Next, in the case of a portable CD player, a method of providing a top cover 389 that opens and closes up and down as shown in FIG. In the present invention, when the upper pig 389 is opened and closed, the magnetic head 8 and the magnetic head traverse shaft 363b are opened and closed in conjunction with the upper pig 389. When the upper pig 389 is in the "open" state, the magnetic head 8 moves away from the recording medium 2 together with the upper pig 389, as shown in FIG. When the upper pig 389 is in the “open” state, the upper pig 389 is closed, and the magnetic head 8 and the magnetic head traverse shaft 363 b approach the vicinity of the recording medium 2. The magnetic head 8 comes into contact with the recording medium 2 only when magnetic recording / reproduction is required by the head actuator 22.

The optical head 6 is tracked by the traverse actuator 23, the traverse gear 367b, and the traverse shaft 363a. At this time, it is transmitted to the traverse gear 367c by the traverse gear 367a, and the magnetic head traverse shaft 367b moves in the direction of the arrow 51. Since the magnetic head 8 moves in the same direction and the same distance in conjunction with the optical head 6 in this manner, the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 are aligned as described above when the upper pig 389 is closed. In other words, the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 access a predetermined magnetic track on the back side of a preset optical track.

As described above, by moving the magnetic head 8 and the magnetic head traverse in conjunction with the upper pig 389, the present invention can be applied to a CD player of the upper pig opening / closing type, so that the entire player can be reduced in size and weight. effective.

Next, a cartridge for storing the CDROM of the present invention will be described. First, FIG. 133 shows a perspective view of the optical disk cartridge of the present invention. Now, a conventional CD-ROM cartridge will be described with reference to FIG. The conventional cartridge for CDROM has a cassette lid 397 that rotates in the direction of arrow 51c around the rotating shaft 39 in order to take out the recording medium 2 such as a CDROM. It has a shutter 301 for the recording surface.

カ ー ト リ ッ ジ In the case of the cartridge of the present invention, a shutter 391 for a magnetic surface is added to the cassette pig 390. When the shutter 392 on the optical recording surface opens in the direction of the arrow 51a, the window of the optical recording unit opens, and the coupling portion 392 causes the magnetic surface shutter 391 to slide in the direction of the arrow 51a. Opens. Thus, by using the disk cassette 42 of the present invention, the CD can be detached, and at the same time, the windows on both sides of the magnetic recording surface and the optical recording surface can be opened and closed, so that the optical recording and reproducing and the magnetic recording and reproducing of the present invention can be performed simultaneously. effective. Further, there is an effect that it is completely compatible with the conventional single-sided window type CDROM cartridge for optical recording and reproduction.

(Example 15)
In the first, second, and third embodiments, the example in which the auxiliary magnetic recording layer 3 is provided on one side of the recording medium 2 in the cartridge 42 has been described.

In the fifteenth embodiment, a case is shown in which the magnetic recording layer 3 is provided on the outer surface of the cartridge 42 of the disk 2. FIG. 136 is a block diagram of the entire recording / reproducing apparatus of the fifteenth embodiment, and FIGS. 137a, b, c and 138a, b, c show recording / reproducing states of the fifteenth embodiment when a cartridge is inserted, fixed, and ejected, respectively. Is shown. 139a, b, and c show cross-sectional views of FIGS. 137a, b, and c.

FIG. 136 shows the overall block diagram. The basic configuration and principle of the optical recording / reproducing unit and the magnetic recording / reproducing unit are the same as the configuration in which the noise canceller of the magnetic recording / reproducing unit is removed from the block diagram of FIG. 87 and the block diagram of FIG. Omitted.

記録 The recording / reproducing apparatus 1 shown in FIG. 136 has an insertion port 394 for the cartridge 42 of a disk, and FIG. 136 shows a state after the cartridge 42 is inserted in the direction of the arrow 51.

FIGS. 137 and 138 are perspective views when the cartridge is inserted and removed, and show the state when the cassette is attached and detached. FIG. 139 is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic head portion when the cassette is inserted.

As shown in FIG. 137 (a), when inserting the cartridge 42 into the recording / reproducing apparatus 1, first, the optical sensor 386 applies the optical mark 387 such as a bar code provided on a part of the label portion 396 to the optical sensor 386. The data is read by the optical reproducing circuit 38 in FIG. 136, and the synchronous clock signal is reproduced by the clock reproducing circuit 389 in FIG. The reproduced data is sent to the system control unit 10. If it is determined that the magnetic recording layer 3 is present, a head elevating command is sent, and the head actuator 21 causes the head elevating unit 20 to move the magnetic heads 8a and 8b to the magnetic recording layer 3. In the direction of. Thus, the data of the magnetic recording layer 3 is transferred to the magnetic heads 8a. 8b, and is demodulated into data by the demodulators 341a, 341b of the first and second magnetic reproducing circuits 30a, 30b. At this time, by using the synchronous clock signal reproduced by the clock reproducing circuit 38a based on the signal of the optical mark section 387, demodulation can be reliably performed even if the traveling speed changes. For this reason, even if the cartridge 42 is manually inserted and the traveling speed at the time of the insertion fluctuates greatly, there is an effect that the data recorded on the magnetic recording layer 3 can be reliably obtained. Further, by recording identification information such as the ID number of the cartridge and the title of software in the optical mark 387, data management can be performed for each cassette.

In this case, one magnetic head 8 is sufficient. However, by performing recording and reproduction of the same data twice with two magnetic heads as shown in FIG. 136, the data reading reliability is improved. The combining circuit 397 combines error-free portions of data 1 and data 2 to create complete data without error, reproduces data including index information such as TOC data, and stores the data in the IC memory 34. The TOC data includes information on the previous directory of the cartridge 42, the process of recording / reproducing, and the result. Therefore, when the cartridge 42 is inserted, the contents and progress of the optical disk can be known.

As shown in FIG. 137 (b), magnetic recording / reproduction is arbitrarily performed while the cartridge 42 is mounted inside, and new information is added or recorded information is deleted. . In this case, the contents of the TOC must be changed each time. However, in the case of the present invention, the data of the magnetic recording layer 3 is not rewritten and the TOC data of the IC Rewrite. Thus, the content of the new TOC data in the IC memory 34 differs from that of the old TOC data in the magnetic recording layer 3. As shown in FIG. 137 (c), when the cartridge 42 is taken out, the data of the magnetic recording layer is updated by the magnetic head 8b. The written data is immediately reproduced and verified by the magnetic head 8b.

(4) In this case, if the number of tracks of the magnetic recording layer 3 is one, no contrivance is required. However, when there are multiple tracks, for example, three tracks, mistakes in recording are reduced by rewriting the data of only the track for which the TOC data needs to be rewritten, for example, the second track. In this case, as shown in FIG. 137 (C), when the cartridge 42 is taken out, only the third track is recorded by the magnetic head 8b.

In the case of # 1 head, this is completed. On the other hand, in the case of two heads as shown in FIG. 137, the signal 68 recorded by the magnetic head 8a is simultaneously read and an error check is performed. As shown in FIG. 139 (C), the magnetic signal 68a recorded by the magnetic head 8b can be verified by the magnetic head 8a. If there is an error, the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus 1 issues an error message on the display unit 16 and displays "Please insert the cassette again." At the same time as notifying the operator, an instruction is issued to the operator to allow the cartridge 42 to be inserted into the insertion portion 394 again. When inserted again, the TOC data is recorded again when ejected, so that the second time recording can be performed without error with a considerably high probability. If this is repeated many times, it is determined that the magnetic recording layer 3 of the cartridge 42 has been destroyed, the ID number of the optical mark 387 is recorded, and when the cartridge 42 of that ID number is inserted again, No command to lower the magnetic head 8 is issued, and no magnetic data is read. The ID No. data is backed up and stored in the IC memory 34. In this way, the TOC data can be reliably recorded and reproduced on the cartridge 42 of each disk. According to the present invention, the table of contents of a disc can be detected when a disc is inserted into a cartridge by adding a small number of components. Since only a magnetic label needs to be attached to the media side, the effect of being able to be added to the conventional cartridge 42 is realized at low cost.

(Example 16)
In the sixteenth embodiment, the disk cartridge described in the fifteenth embodiment is changed to a tape cartridge.

More specifically, a magnetic recording layer having a protective layer 50 described with reference to FIG. 3 is installed.

Figure 140 shows the overall block diagram. The basic configuration and principle are the same as those in FIG.

記録 The recording / reproducing apparatus 1 in FIG. 140 has an insertion port 394 for the cartridge 42 of the cassette of the VTR, and FIG. The perspective views of FIGS. 141 and 142 when the cassette is inserted and removed are shown when the cassette is attached and detached, and FIG. 143 is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic head when the cassette is inserted.

As shown in FIG. 142 (a), when the cartridge 42 is inserted into the VTR, first, an optical mark 387 in which information such as a bar code provided on a part of the label portion 396 and a synchronization signal are recorded by the optical sensor 386. Is read by the optical sensor 386, data is reproduced by the optical reproduction circuit 38 in FIG. 140, and a synchronous clock signal is reproduced by the clock reproduction circuit 389. The reproduced data is sent to the system control unit 10. If it is determined that the magnetic recording layer 3 is present, a head elevating command is sent, and the head actuator 21 causes the head elevating unit 20 to move the magnetic heads 8a and 8b to the magnetic recording layers. Touch 3. Thus, the data recorded on the magnetic recording layer 3 is transferred to the magnetic heads 8a. 8b, the original data is demodulated by the demodulators 341a, 341b of the first and second magnetic reproducing circuits 30a, 30b. At this time, by using the synchronous clock signal of the above-described clock recovery circuit 38a at the time of demodulation, demodulation can be reliably performed even if the running speed fluctuates. Therefore, the running speed at the time of inserting the cartridge 42 is greatly increased. There is an effect that the data of the magnetic recording layer can be reliably read even if it fluctuates. In addition, by recording index information such as an ID number and a software title in the optical mark 387, management for each cassette can be performed.

(4) In this case, the magnetic head 8 basically operates by one. However, by reading the same data twice with the two magnetic heads, the data reading reliability is improved. The combining circuit 397 combines error-free portions of the data 1 and data 2 to create complete data without errors, and the reproduced data including the TOC data and the like is stored in the IC memory 34. The TOC data includes the absolute address of the cartridge 42 at the end of the previous time and the absolute address of the start and end of each song or segment. Therefore, the absolute address of the tape at the time when the cartridge 42 is inserted at the stage when the magnetic data is reproduced can be known. Therefore, the contents of the absolute address counter 398 of the system control unit 10 are rewritten by the information of the absolute address.

Here, let's take a case where the tape contains music.

For example, it can be seen that the current address is at 1:08 of the eighth song and the current absolute address is at 62:12. Here, when the user wants to access the point of 42:26 of the absolute address of the sixth track, the tape is rewound while referring to the data of the absolute address detection head 399 by the amount of the absolute address of 19:46 to obtain the sixth track. Cueing can be performed at high speed. In this case, the access speed can be greatly increased as compared with the conventional method by accelerating and decelerating at the highest rewind speed to know in advance how much the tape should be rewound to reach the target point. Also, a list of TOC information can be displayed instantaneously when a tape is inserted. Therefore, the VTR, DAT, and DCC can be made intelligent in the tape recorder. As shown in FIG. 141 (b), while the cartridge 42 is mounted inside, magnetic recording / reproducing is arbitrarily performed, so that a new song is added or a recorded song is deleted. I do. In this case, the contents of the TOC must be changed each time, but in the case of the present invention, the data of the magnetic recording layer 3 is not rewritten and the TOC of the IC Rewrite only data. Thus, the content of the new TOC data in the IC memory 34 is different from that of the old TOC data in the magnetic recording layer 3.

(4) In this case, if the number of tracks of the magnetic recording layer 3 is one, no contrivance is required. However, when there are multiple tracks, for example, three tracks, mistakes in recording are reduced by rewriting the data of only the track for which the TOC data needs to be rewritten, for example, the second track. In this case, as shown in FIG. 137 (C), when the cartridge 42 is taken out, only the third track is recorded by the magnetic head 8b.

In the case of # 1 head, this is completed. On the other hand, in the case of two heads as shown in FIG. 137, the signal 68 recorded by the magnetic head 8a is simultaneously read and an error check is performed. As shown in FIG. 139 (C), the magnetic signal 68a recorded by the magnetic head 8b can be verified by the magnetic head 8a. If there is an error, the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus 1 issues an error message on the display unit 16 and displays "Please insert the cassette again." At the same time as notifying the operator, an instruction is issued to the operator to allow the cartridge 42 to be inserted into the insertion portion 394 again. When inserted again, the TOC data is recorded again when ejected, so that the second time recording can be performed without error with a considerably high probability. If this is repeated many times, it is determined that the magnetic recording layer 3 of the cartridge 42 has been destroyed, the ID number of the optical mark 387 is recorded, and when the cartridge 42 of that ID number is inserted again, No command to lower the magnetic head 8 is issued, and no magnetic data is read. The tape with this ID number is stored in the IC memory 34 while backing it up. Thus, the TOC data can be reliably recorded and reproduced for each cartridge 42 of the VTR tape. In the case of DAT, VTR, DCC, etc., TOC data cannot be accessed instantaneously because of tape media. For this reason, there was a problem that the content list could not be displayed, and the current song number was not known at the time of insertion. However, the present invention realizes a TOC function that does not require additional access time for a small part. Since only the magnetic label needs to be attached to the cartridge side of the tape, it can be added to the existing tape cartridge 42, and at the same time, the above-mentioned effects are realized at low cost.

(Example 17)
A method for preventing unauthorized copying of a program from a CD, CDROM or CD-ROM illegally copied to a personal computer of a regular number or more in the seventeenth embodiment will be described.

First, a detailed description will be given of a method of unlocking a specific program key on an optical disk such as a CDROM in which a large number of programs each having a key such as Password are recorded. As shown in FIG. 147, since the CD adopts the disk copy prevention method of the present invention, the CD cannot be copied. Further, a different ID number for each disc is provided in the optical mark portion 387 of the CD. Is recorded. For example, data such as "2044312001" is read by an optical sensor 386 including a light emitting unit 386a and a light receiving unit 386b, and the Disk ID No. of the key management table 404 in the memory of the CPU is read. (OPT). Normally, this method can be used, but the optical mark may be reproduced on a printing press by an unauthorized duplicator. In order to further enhance the anti-duplication effect, as described above, a high Hc portion 401 of very high Hc such as 4000 Oe made of barium ferrite is provided, and a magnetic ID No. (Mag) Data "205162" is magnetically recorded. Since this data can be reproduced by a normal magnetic head, the data can be reproduced. (Mag).

示 す As shown in the process diagram of the ID number in FIG. 241 (a), the process of recording the ID number on the medium 2 can be performed in one second or less by using the magnetizer 540 shown in FIG. The magnetizer 540 has a ring shape as shown in FIGS. 242 (a) and (b) and has a plurality of magnetized poles 542a to 542f as shown in FIGS. 242 (c) and (d). Have been. As for the current from the magnetizing current generator 543, an arbitrary current flows through the coils 545a to 545f by the current direction switch 544, so that an arbitrary magnetization direction can be obtained.

FIG. 242 (d) shows a case where the magnetization directions of the S, N, S, S, N, and S poles are set from the left. In this case, magnetic recording signals in the directions of arrows 51a, 51b, 51c and 51d are instantaneously recorded on the magnetic recording layer 3. Recording can be performed even with a high Hc magnetic material of 4000 Oe. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 241 (a), a CD in which an ID is recorded can be produced in the same time as in the conventional process diagram 241 (b).

(4) In the method of magnetically recording the ID number while rotating the medium 2 using the magnetic head, it takes several seconds including the rising of the rotation of the medium, the rotation of several rotations, and the stop of the rotation. Therefore, there has been a problem that it is difficult to introduce a CD into a mass production process that requires only a process time of about one second without changing the process flow.

As shown in the process diagram of the ID number in FIG. 241 (a), the process of recording the ID number on the medium 2 can be performed in one second or less by using the magnetizer 540 shown in FIG. Is more suitable for The recording operation of the magnetizer 540 will be described. The magnetizer 540 has a ring shape as shown in FIGS. 242 (a) and (b) and has a plurality of magnetized poles 542a to 542f as shown in FIGS. 242 (c) and (d). 545a to 545f are wound. As for the current from the magnetizing current generator 543, an arbitrary current flows through the coils 545a to 545f by the current direction switch 544, so that an arbitrary magnetization direction can be obtained. FIG. 242 (d) shows a case where the magnetization directions of the S, N, S, S, N, and S poles are set from the left. In this case, in the magnetic recording layer 3, magnetic recording signals in the directions of arrows 51a, 51b, 51c, 51d are instantaneously recorded on a specific track in a few ms, for example. In the case of a magnetizer, a large current can flow, so that recording can be performed even with a high Hc magnetic material of 4000 Oe. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 241 (a), the ID can be recorded in the same operation time as the other steps in the conventional process diagram of FIG. 241 (b), so that a CD can be produced without changing the process flow at all. . In addition, when the magnetizer 540 is used, the ID number can be magnetically recorded without rotating the medium 2, so that the throughput of the process can be shortened. In addition, since the medium is not rotated, the process can be performed as shown in FIG. As shown, even if printing is performed in the printing process after recording the ID number, there is an effect that printing can be performed accurately at a predetermined angle.

Currently, magnetic heads capable of recording on a magnetic recording layer having Hc of about 2700 Oe are commercially available. For this reason, a problem that the ID number is falsified when Hc is low can be assumed. To cope with this problem, the magnetizer 540 of the present invention generates a strong magnetic field, so that the ID number can be recorded even in the magnetic recording layer 3 having a high Hc such as Hc = 4000 Oe. When an ID number is recorded by using the high Hc magnetic recording layer 3 for a specific track, the ID number of this medium cannot be rewritten, that is, falsified by a magnetic head 8 which is generally available. This has the effect of improving security.

Further, in the present invention, as shown in FIG. 243, the data of the disk physical arrangement table 532 and the signal of the generator 546 of the unique ID number are mixed by the mixer 547 so that it is difficult to separate without the separation key. The signal is sent to the encryptor 537 together with the separation key 548 to make the code 538, and is recorded on the magnetic recording track 67 after the molding process, or is recorded on the optical recording track 65 in the master forming process. On the recording / reproducing apparatus 1 side, the encryption is decrypted by the encryption decoder 543, the ID number 550 and the disk physical arrangement table 532 are separated by the separation key in the separator 549 by the separation key, and illegality as described with reference to FIGS. The illegal disk is checked by the disk check method, and the operation of the illegal disk is stopped.

In the case of the method shown in FIG. 243, the encryption 538 recorded on the magnetic recording track 67 is a unique ID number generator 546. Since a mixed signal of the ID number and the disk physical layout table is encrypted by the unique ID number generator 546, one by one Are different for each disk. As a matter of course, since this disk uses the illegal duplication prevention system of the present invention, an illegal duplicator cannot illegally duplicate the optical recording portion of the CD. For this reason, the unauthorized user has no alternative but to alter the ID number. By finding a disk with the same master disk as the disk for which the password is known and recording the same code in the magnetic recording unit, unauthorized use can be made by using this password. When the encryption of the disk physical arrangement table and the encryption of the ID number are separately recorded, the encryption of the same physical arrangement table is recorded on the magnetic recording layer of all disks of the same master, and by reading this encryption, the disk of the same master is read. Since the ID number is easily identified, there is a problem that the ID number may be illegally used by rewriting the code of the ID number with the code of the ID number for which the password is known. However, in the method shown in FIG. 243, since a plurality of different masters exist for one disk, and the encryption is completely different for each disk, it is determined that the two disks are the same master. You can't just confirm. The information in the disk physical arrangement table 532 of the disk must be read over the entire area of one disk, and it must be checked whether or not the disk is the same master. Checking all data of the address, angle, tracking, pit depth, and error rate requires a large-scale device and a confirmation time. Therefore, it is difficult for an illegal duplicator to find the same original disk as a disk such as a CD whose password is known, and it is difficult for the illegal duplicator to falsify the ID number.

Here, the specific procedure will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. At step 405, the program No. When the start command of N is received, at step 405a, it is read whether or not the key information of the program is recorded on the magnetic track. At this time, a recording current is passed by the magnetic head, and this data is erased. If the disc is a regular disc, the key information cannot be erased because Hc is high. If the disk is unauthorized, the key information will be lost because Hc is low. Next, in step 405b, it is checked whether or not there is key data, that is, Password. If No, in step 405c, a key input command is transmitted to the user as shown in the screen diagram of FIG. 170. Then, check if it is correct in step 405e. If "No", stop in step 405f, display "Incorrect key or duplicate disk" on the screen, and if Yes, proceed to step 405g, The key data for opening N is recorded on the magnetic track of the recording medium 2, and the process proceeds to step 405i.

戻 り Return to step 405b. If Yes, program No. in step 405h. The key data of N is read, the disk ID (OPT) of the optical recording layer is read in step 405i, the disk ID (Mag) recorded in the magnetic recording layer is read in step 405j, and it is checked whether it is correct in step 405k. If the result is "No", "replicated disk" is displayed at step 405m and the operation is stopped. If Yes, the decryption operation of the key data, the disk ID (OPT), and the disk ID (Mag) is performed in step 405n to check whether the data is correct. A check is made in step 405p, an error is displayed in step 405q if No, and a program No. in step 405s if Yes. Start using N.

In the case of using this method of the present invention, if a CD is used, 120 songs whose voices are compressed to 1/5 are inserted, and if the game software is used, hundreds of titles are inserted so that the user can listen to 12 CDs or one game at first. It can be sold at a price commensurate with the copyright fee for 12 songs or one game. Then, when the user later pays a fee, the software trader can confirm the ID No. of the disc. 147, software such as an additional song or an additional game can be used as shown in FIG. In this case, by adopting the audio decompression block 407, a maximum of 120 pieces of music software can be stored in one CD because the length of the CD is 370 minutes, which is five times larger. be able to. When the key is released once, the key data is recorded, so that it is not necessary to insert the key every time. Similar effects can be obtained by using the electronic dictionary or general photo CD program other than the music CD and the game CD. In order to reduce the cost, the ID No. May be omitted.

Next, a method for preventing copying of the CD itself will be described. CDs are currently being illegally copied in various forms, and there is a need for a method of preventing such copying. Unauthorized copying cannot be prevented only by software such as encryption. In the present invention, a method for preventing duplication by using a pit arrangement of a CD and an encryption method will be described.

As shown in the block diagram of the mastering device in FIG. 234, a mastering device 529 for producing a master of a CLV-type optical disc such as a CD has a linear velocity control unit 26a, and in the case of a CD, from 1.2 to 1.4 m / s. While keeping the linear velocity within the range of s, the optical head 6 records a latent image of the pit on the photosensitive member on the disk 2 by light beam exposure. In the case of a CD, the tracking circuit 24 increases the radius r at a pitch of about 1.6 μm per rotation, so that pits are recorded in a spiral. Thus, as shown in FIG. 236 (a), the data is recorded on the master on a spiral. In the case of a CAV optical disk such as a video disk, an original disk can be reproduced, and the rotation and the rotation control can be completely linked to create a master disk. Therefore, when a third party obtains the master data 528, the mastering device 529 can easily create an original master of an optical disk having exactly the same pit pattern as a CAV optical disk manufactured properly. In the case of CAV, the difference between the bit patterns of a properly manufactured master and an illegally manufactured master is kept within several μm. For this reason, it is not possible to distinguish an illegally created optical disk that has been properly created by the conventional method from the physical arrangement of the pit pattern.

On the other hand, in the case of a CLV optical disk such as a CD-ROM, the data is recorded on a master on a spiral at a constant linear velocity initially set within a range of 1.2 to 1.4 m / s. In the case of CAV, the number of data to be recorded in one round is always constant, but in the case of CLV, the number of data in one round changes by changing the linear velocity. When the linear velocity is low, the data arrangement 530a is as shown in FIG. 236 (a), and when the linear velocity is high, the data arrangement 530b is as shown in FIG. 236 (b). As described above, it can be seen that the data arrangement 530 is different between the normal CD and the illegally copied CD in the normal mastering device. With a commercially available mastering device for a CD, the linear velocity can be set with a high accuracy of 0.001 m / s. Then, a master is created at a constant linear velocity. Even if a 74-minute CD master is created at a linear velocity of 1.2 m / s with this high accuracy, the error is shifted to the plus side in the outermost track. There is an error of 11.783 revolutions. That is, a master having a data arrangement 530b having an angular error of 11.783 turns × 360 degrees at the outermost periphery as compared with the ideal master is obtained. Thus FIG. 236 (a) the address of the data arrangement 530 i.e. each of A ₁ ~A ₂₆ 323a~x as in FIG. 236 (b) is different from the CD legitimate CD and illegally duplicated. For example 4 is divided, when you define the placement zone 531 of Z ₁ to Z _4, arrangement zones 531 of the address 323 of the A ₁ to A ₂₆ are different. Therefore, when a correspondence table between the arrangement zone 531 of the two CDs and the address 323, that is, the physical position table 532, is created, as shown in FIGS. 236 (a) and 236 (b), Is different between a regular CD and an illegally copied CD. By utilizing this difference, an illegally copied CD can be distinguished from a legitimate CD.

However, even if a CD that is simply hard to physically copy is made, the effect is weak if the method of checking a legitimate CD as legitimate is easily falsified. As shown in FIG. 238, in the present invention, the physical position table 532 is created during the production of the master of the CD or after the production of the master is completed. This physical arrangement table 532 is encrypted by the encryption means 537 using a one-way function such as a public encryption key system of the RSA system and recorded on the optical ROM section 65 of the CD medium 2 or the magnetic recording track 67 of the CD medium 2a. I do.

Next, the drive reproduces the encrypted signal 538b from the CD medium 2 or 2a, and restores the physical layout table 532 using the decryption program 534 reproduced from the optical recording section of the CD. Similarly, using the disk check program 533a reproduced from the CD, the disk rotation angle information 335 for the address 38a of the actual CD is obtained from the rotation pulse signal or index from the above-mentioned FG, and is compared with the data of the physical arrangement table 532. If so, START is performed, and if NO, it is determined that the CD is an illegally copied CD, and the operation of the software program and the reproduction of the music software are stopped. The unauthorized copy CD shown in FIG. 236 (b) is rejected because the physical position table 532b is different from the regular one. Unless the encryption encoding program 537 can be decrypted, the illegally copied CD does not operate. Therefore, even if the encryption signal is copied, it is rejected. Thus, there is a great effect that reproduction of an illegally copied CD can be almost completely prevented.

Assuming that an unauthorized duplicator can take measures against the CD drive of the present invention, the following three cases can be considered.

{1. Make a master CLV disk with exactly the same pit pattern. 2. The secretref key encoding program shown in FIG. 3. All programs in the CD-ROM are analyzed, and the encryption decoding program 534 and the disk check program 533a are replaced by program modification. Of the above, the third method is meaningless because it takes a long time to decode and modify the program, that is, a large amount of cost, so that the benefit of copying the CD is reduced. Also, in the case of the present invention, since the encryption decoding program 534 and the disk check program 533a are provided not on the drive but on the medium, it can be changed for each CD-ROM title or press. Therefore, since investment for program decryption and decryption is required for each title, the profit of an unauthorized duplication trader is deteriorated, and there is an effect of economically preventing duplication.

Next, the second method uses a one-way function such as a public encryption key method such as the RSA method shown in FIG. 238 in the present invention. For example, an arithmetic expression C = E (M) = M ^e _mod n can be used. For this reason, even if one of the encryption decoding programs, that is, one of the keys is disclosed on the CD-ROM, the decryption of the encryption encoding program 537 of the other key takes, for example, one billion years, so that it is not decrypted. However, there is a possibility that the information of the encryption encoding program 537 is leaked. However, in the method of FIG. 238, there is an encryption decoding program 534 on the media side instead of the drive side. Therefore, even if it is leaked, at the time of the leak, by changing both the encryption program pair, there is an effect that the copy protection can be easily restored again.

Lastly, in the first method, to produce a CLV master having exactly the same pit pattern, the current mastering device 529 for CLV outputs a rotation signal of one pulse per rotation, but detects the rotation angle with high accuracy and controls. It is difficult because there is no mechanism to do this. However, by reading the rotation angle information and the recording signal of the copy source CD and synchronizing the rotation pulse at the time of copying, a similar pit pattern can be drawn with a certain degree of positional accuracy, though not accurately. However, this only holds when the source CD is recorded at the same linear velocity.

As shown in FIG. 234, the mastering device 529 of the present invention generates the CLV modulation signal generation units 10a to CLV modulation signals and sends them to the linear velocity modulation unit 26a in some cases. The signal is sent to 37a for CLV modulation. It has a linear velocity modulation section 26a, and randomly modulates the linear velocity from 1.2 m / s to 1.4 m / s within the range of the CD standard as shown in FIG. 235 (a). This can be realized even when the signal is modulated by the time axis modulator 37a while keeping the linear velocity constant. In this case, the device does not need to be modified. It is difficult to detect this linear velocity modulation from the copy source CD with high accuracy. Because it is recorded without random control, it cannot be duplicated even with the mastering device that made the master. It will be a different master every time. Therefore, it is almost impossible to completely reproduce the CD containing the linear velocity modulation of the present invention. However, since the linear velocity of a CD is within the standard range of 1.2 to 1.4 m / s, data can be normally reproduced by a normal CD-ROM player currently on the market.

Next, FIG. 235 endpoint A ₁ the starting point of the case of recording a specific optical track 65a of the same data at a linear velocity of constant 1.2 m / a which has finished recording data when the S as (b) is 360 Let's suppose that it comes to the position of ゜. In this case, as shown in FIG 235 (c), when increased speed uniformly from 1.2 m / s to 1.4 m / s in one revolution, the physical position 539a of the address A ₃ to 30 DEG physical position 539b come. Then, when the speed is increased by 1/2 rotation, it comes to the position of the physical position 539c shifted by 45 °. That is, the position can be changed by a maximum of 45 ° in one round. Since an ordinary CLV mastering device generates a rotation pulse only once in one round, this error is accumulated until two rotations are made, and a position shift of 90 ° occurs. In the future, even if an unauthorized copy company performs rotation control, a displacement of 90 ° will occur between the regular master and the master of the illegal copy due to the linear velocity modulation of the present invention. An illegally copied CD can be detected by detecting this displacement. It can be seen that the positional deviation detection resolution may be set to 90 degrees or less. Thus when changing the linear velocity in the range of 1.2 to 1.4 m / s, as shown in FIG. 236 (a) (b) at least _{Z 1, Z 2, Z 3} , 4 two 90 ° in Z ₄ By setting the division zone, unauthorized CD can be detected. It can be said that the angle division of four division abnormalities is effective.

Of course, if a highly accurate mastering device for CLV is newly developed, the same bit pattern can be created by an illegal duplicator. However, such a device can only be developed by a few companies in the world and is a function not required for normal use. By limiting the shipment of such mastering devices for copyright protection, unauthorized copying is completely prevented.

Next, in the mastering device having the rotation angle sensor 17a shown in FIG. 234, the physical position table 532 is created by the address information 32a of the input data and the rotation angle position information 32b from the motor 17, and is encrypted by the encryption encoder 537. Recording is performed on the outer peripheral portion of the master 2 by the recording circuit 37. Thus, the encrypted physical arrangement table 532 can be recorded on the optical track 65 of the disk 2 in FIG. 238 when the master is created. Therefore, this disk can be reproduced by a normal CD-ROM drive without a magnetic head. However, in this case, it is necessary to provide a disk rotation angle sensor 335 in the drive as shown in FIGS. 238 and 239. Since this detecting means only needs to detect a zone of 90 ° relative to the address 323, it is not always necessary to use a complicated sensor such as an angle sensor. FIG. 237 describes the relative position detection method. For example, as shown in FIG. 237 (a), the rotation pulse of the motor and the index signal of the optical sensor are generated once per fixed rotation of the disk. By dividing this interval by time as shown in FIG. 237 (b), signal position time slots Z _{1 to} Z ₆ are determined in the case of a 6-divided zone. On the other hand, the address signals 323a and 323b are obtained from the sub-code of the reproduction signal as described above. Address A ₁ from the signal position signal is in the zone Z _1, the address A ₂ can be detected to be in the zone Z _3.

(4) In this case, if a rotation signal or a Zone signal is recorded in the sub-code, the configuration is certainly simple. However, since this data can be copied in its entirety, there is no copy protection effect. Therefore, a method of providing a means for detecting the rotation angle other than the optical recording section as in the present invention has a high anti-duplication effect.

３９ Returning to FIG. 239, in the recording / reproducing apparatus 1, the signal is reproduced by the optical reproducing circuit 38, and if there is a physical arrangement table 532 in the optical track, the process proceeds from step 471 b to steps 471 d and 471 e in the flowchart of FIG. If step 471b is No, it is checked in step 471c whether or not there is encrypted data in the magnetic recording unit 67. If No, the process proceeds to step 471r to permit activation. If Yes, the process proceeds to steps 471d and 471e to reproduce the encrypted data, activate the decryption program of the encryption decoder 534 recorded on the ROM or disk of the drive, decrypt the encryption, and decrypt the physical arrangement table 532, that is, An: Zn in step 471f. Create a zone address mapping table for In step 471w, it is checked whether there is a disk check program in the medium. If No, the process proceeds to step 471p. If Yes, the disk check program recorded in the disk is started in step 471g. In the disk check program of step 471f, first, n = 0 in step 471h, n = n + 1 in step 471i, and in step 471j, the drive searches for the address An of the disk 2 and reproduces it. In step 471k, the address information Z'n is detected and output from the address position detecting means 335 described above. At step 471m, Z'n = Zn is checked, and if No, it is determined at step 471u that the copy is an illegal copy CD, a display of "illegal copy CD" is displayed on the display section 16, and the stop is performed at step 471s. If Step 471m is Yes, n = last is checked in Step 471n. If No, the process returns to Step 471i. If Yes, the process proceeds to Step 471p. In step 471p, it is checked whether there is a disk check program in the ROM or RAM on the drive side. If No, the software is started in step 471r. In the case of Yes, the disk check program is run in step 471q. This content is exactly the same as step 471t. If No, the process proceeds to steps 471u and 471s. In the case of Yes, the reproduction of the software in the disc is started in step 471r.

{Circle around (5)} When reproducing a disc with a linear velocity changed between 1.2 and 1.4 m / s in a currently manufactured CD player, the original signal can be reproduced without any problem. On the other hand, the mastering device can perform cutting with a considerably strict linear velocity accuracy of 0.001 m / s or more. Therefore, a CD standard of linear velocity = ± 0.01 m / s is provided as a standard for a mastering device. When the CD standard is adhered to, the linear velocity can be increased from 1.20 m / s to 1.22 m / s, for example, as shown in FIGS. 244 (a) and (b). In this case, as shown in FIGS. 244 (c) and (d), the physical arrangement at the same address is shifted from 539a to 539b by an angle of 5.9 degrees per rotation of the disk. As shown in FIG. 246, if a rotation angle sensor 335 for detecting the 5.9 degree angle shift is provided on the recording / reproducing apparatus side, the difference in the physical arrangement can be discriminated. In the case of a CD, it is sufficient to have a rotation angle sensor 335 that divides the angle into 6 ° resolution, that is, 1/60 or more rotations per rotation.

構成 The configuration of the rotation angle sensor 355 is shown in the block diagram of the recording / reproducing apparatus in FIG. The pulse output from the rotation angle sensor 17a such as the FG of the motor 17 is time-divided by the time division circuit 553a in the angular position detection unit 553 in the disk physical arrangement detection unit 556, so that the rotation is performed once per rotation. Even when only a pulse signal is obtained, for example, when a time accuracy of ± 5% is obtained, an angle resolution of about 18 ° can be obtained because the signal can be divided into 20 parts. This operation has been described with reference to FIGS. 237 (a), (b), and (c). In the case of a CD, since there is an eccentricity of ± 200 μm, an angle measurement error occurs due to the eccentricity. In the case of a CD standard disc, an eccentricity causes an angle measurement error of 0.8 degrees at the maximum in PP. Therefore, when an angle measurement resolution of 1 ° is required, measurement cannot be performed. In order to avoid this, when high-precision angular resolution is required, an eccentricity detection unit 553c is provided in the angular position detection unit 553 in FIG. 249 to detect the eccentricity, and the eccentricity correction unit 553b performs a correction calculation. To compensate for the effects of eccentricity. A method of detecting the amount of eccentricity and calculating a correction value will be described. As shown in FIG. 252 (a), when there is no eccentricity, the three points A, B, and C on the same radius of the disk have the true disk center 557 at the center of the triangle when θa = θb = θc. is there. Actually, as shown in FIG. 252 (b), the eccentricity 559 is generated due to the eccentricity of the disk or the mounting error of the disk. As shown in FIG. 252 (b), by detecting the relative angles of the three addresses A, B, and C by the angle sensor 353, the deviation L'a between the rotation center 558 of the disk and the true disk center 557 is reduced. As shown in the figure, it can be obtained by the calculation of L′ a = f (θa, θb, θc). The eccentricity correction unit 553b corrects and calculates the rotation angle signal of the rotation angle sensor 17a using the calculated eccentricity amount, so that the influence of the eccentricity can be corrected, so that the angular resolution is improved to 1 ° or less. And the detection accuracy of the unauthorized disk can be further improved.

{When detecting an angular position with a low resolution of about 6 ° as described above, the discrimination result between an unauthorized disc and a legitimate disc requires strictness. In particular, it is absolutely necessary to avoid discriminating a legitimate disk as being fraudulent, since it will cause serious damage to legitimate users. Therefore, as shown in steps 551t, 551u, and 551v of the flowchart in FIG. 247, an address determined to be illegal is accessed and reproduced two or more times and checked, thereby making it possible to avoid erroneous determination. The basic flowchart is omitted because it is the same as FIG. 240, and only the additional steps will be described. If it is determined in step 551r that the value is not within the allowable value, the address An is re-accessed a plurality of times in step 551t, and An is re-accessed in step 551u. , The zone number Z'n indicating the relative angle with respect to is detected, and it is checked a plurality of times at step 551v to see if it is within the allowable value. If No, it is regarded as an unauthorized disk, and the process proceeds to steps 471u and 471s, and the program is not operated.

判別 As another method of preventing erroneous determination, the addition of statistical processing increases the accuracy of determination. As shown in FIG. 245 (a), the frequency distribution of the read angle-address, angle-tracking direction, address-tracking direction, angle-pit depth, and address-pit depth in the normal master is as shown in graph 1. Therefore, when specific data is selected and reproduced by a player as shown in graph 2, data of a sample address that is easy to discriminate is selected. Then, the disk molded as shown in FIG. 245 (b) is reproduced, and a signal portion deviating from the allowable value as shown in black in graph 3 is found, and an abnormal value deviating from the allowable value as shown in graph 4 Remove from the list. Although the frequency distribution of the angle-address arrangement is shown in the figure, the same effect can be obtained with the distribution of the pit depth and the distribution of the address-tracking amount. This makes it possible to exclude from the list a copy protection signal portion which is difficult to discriminate, that is, which is likely to be determined to be an error, thereby reducing the degree of error in reproduction by the reproduction player. By re-accessing the address determined to be illegal two or more times, the probability of error is further reduced.

On the other hand, in the case of an illegally duplicated master, as shown in FIG. 245 (c), in order to read the address of the molded disk and create the master, first, as shown in graph 5, the distribution is within a certain probability range. The generated CP (copy protection) signal is generated. In this case, since the disk physical arrangement table cannot be falsified as described above, the data sorting operation shown in the graph (2) cannot be performed. Therefore, the physical location of the illegal master contains data that is close to the allowable value limit or a CP signal that exceeds the allowable value. As shown in FIG. 245 (d), an optical disk molded and pressed from such an unauthorized master is further subjected to errors due to molding variations, resulting in a distribution as shown in Graph 6, and an allowable value as indicated by a black portion. Is generated. Since the physical arrangement signal 552b unique to the unauthorized disk is detected by the disk check program, the operation of the program is stopped, and the use of the copy disk is prevented. Thus, the distribution of the angle-address CP (COPYＣＰPROTECT) signal is dispersed within a small range by the forming press. On the other hand, in the case of the pit depth shown in FIG. 250 (b), the depth changes greatly depending on the cutting and molding conditions, and it is extremely difficult to precisely control the depth. The fractionation drops greatly. Therefore, in the case of the pit depth, strong copy protection can be applied.

Here, a reproducing apparatus for detecting the frequency distribution of the physical arrangement of the discs in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 246 and 249, the recording / reproducing apparatus 1 has a disk physical arrangement detecting unit 556, and includes three detecting units of an angular position detecting unit 553, a tracking displacement detecting unit 554, and a pit depth detecting unit 555. And detects the angular position information Z'n, the tracking displacement T'n, and the pit depth D'n, and outputs a detection signal. By confirming the temporal coincidence with the signal A'n of the address detector 557, A'n-Z'n, A'n-T'n, A'n-D'n, and Z'n-T The corresponding data of 'n, Z'n-D'n, T'n-D'n is obtained. This data is compared with An, Zn, Tn, and Dn of the regular reference disk physical arrangement table 532 decrypted by the encryption decoder 534 in the collation unit 535. If the data is not a regular disk, the output / operation stopping unit 536 The operation of the program can be stopped.

Next, a flowchart for reducing the erroneous discrimination of disc discrimination using a statistical method will be described. The description of the same parts as in FIG. 240 of the flowchart in FIG. 247 will be omitted, and the description will be limited to the part for discriminating the disk by paying attention to the distribution frequency of the disk physical arrangement data shown in the graphs 1 to 6 in FIG. I do. First, in the disk check program 471t, a CP (COPY @ PROTECT) decryption program of step 551w, that is, a one-way function calculation unit 534c such as RSA for decrypting the reference physical arrangement table 532 in the encryption decoder 534 of FIG. Whether the first encryption decoder 534a having the above is illegally changed, that is, whether the first encryption decoder 534a has been tampered with and illegally decrypted by the unauthorized encryption decoder, is provided with a checkpoint everywhere in the disk check program and the application program. Check every time. If Yes, stop the operation. This can prevent an illegal duplicator from replacing the first encryption decoder 534a with an unauthorized encryption decoder, thereby increasing the security of encryption and enhancing the prevention of duplication. Next, step 551f will be described. In this step, in the case of the angular position, the position of the specific address is measured, and the distribution state of the shift amount of the zone number with respect to the reference angle in the reference physical arrangement table 532 is measured. If m = 0 is not shifted and m = ± n is defined as a case where n zones are shifted, m = −1 in step 551g, m = m + 1 in step 551h, and the angle zone Z ′ measured in step 551i. It is checked whether n is shifted by m. If No, the process returns to step 551h. If Yes, it is added to the shift distribution list of Z'n in step 551j, and a shift amount distribution table is created one after another. If it is the last in step 551k, the process proceeds to the next step 471n, and if No, the process returns to step 551h. In this way, the angular position of the specific address, the tracking displacement, and the distribution state of the deviation between the pit depth and the reference between the angle / address position shown in FIG. 249 are measured in this manner.

Step 551m in the disk check program 471t is a validity discrimination program, which is a deviation amount from the reference value of the angular arrangement Z'n of the address n, for example, which is encrypted and recorded on the magnetic layer or the optical recording layer in step 551n. The maximum permissible value Pn (m) for m is decrypted and read, and the deviation distribution table 556a and the reference physical arrangement table 532a shown in FIG. 251 created by the physical position deviation distribution measurement program in step 551f described above are checked. And determine the authenticity of the disk. First, at step 551p, m = 0, at step 551q, m = m + 1, and at step 551r, it is checked whether it is within the allowable range. By checking whether the number of Z'n is smaller than Pn (m) in FIG. 251, it is checked whether the number is within the allowable range. If No, the process proceeds to the above-described step 551f, where the corresponding address is accessed again. If no, the process proceeds to step 551s. If step 551r is Yes, the process proceeds to step 551s. If m is last, the process proceeds to step 471p, and if No, the process returns to step 551q. By measuring the distribution of the deviation of Z'n with respect to Zn in this way, statistical processing is performed to determine that the disk is a normal disk if it is within the allowable value and an invalid disk if it is out of the allowable value range. This has the effect that the probability of erroneously determining a legitimate disk as an unauthorized disk and vice versa is reduced.

In the flowchart of FIG. 247, a partial selection signal is sent to the encryption decoder 534 and the magnetic reproduction circuit 30 by the random extractor 582 such as the random number generator 583 shown in FIG. A part of the entire track is selected and accessed and reproduced. This has the effect of shortening the mechanical access time and shortening the duplication check time, since only one part of the total number of encrypted data, for example, about 100 out of 10,000 pieces, needs to be accessed. Further, the random extractor 582 sends a selection signal to the encryption decoder 534, and decrypts a part of the reproduced encrypted data. For example, in the case of 512-bit one-way function encryption, a decryption takes a fraction of a second even with a 32-bit microcomputer. However, the adoption of this partial selection method has the effect that the decryption time can be reduced. Since the random number generator 584 checks the disk for different sample data each time by the minimum required sample amount each time, even in a system in which only 100 sample points are checked out of 10,000 sample points, for example, even a system that finally checks 10,000 You will have to check the number of sample points. Therefore, the duplicator needs to duplicate the physical arrangement of all 10,000 sample points in exactly the same shape as the reference disk. Since it is difficult to duplicate the angles, tracking amounts, and pit depths of all sample points, the effect of preventing duplication is high. With the addition of the random extractor 582, the disk check time can be significantly reduced without reducing the high anti-duplication effect.

246 and 249 will be described again. The disk physical arrangement detection unit of the recording / reproducing apparatus 1 in FIG. 249 includes two detection units other than the above-described angular position detection unit 553, a tracking amount detection unit 554 and a pit depth detection unit 555. First, the tracking amount detection unit 554 receives the tracking amount Tn of the address n from the tracking amount sensor 24a such as a tracking error detection circuit capable of measuring wobbling and the like of the tracking control unit 24 of the optical head 6, and calculates the tracking amount and other information. , And measures the temporal coincidence with other detection signals such as A'n, Z'n, and D'n, and outputs the same to the matching unit 535 as T'n. To illustrate this principle with reference to FIGS. 253 (a) (b), the physical position 539a of the address A ₁ in the regular disk of FIG. 253 (a) it is, with addition tracking direction of the modulation of the wobbling or the like during creation master. Therefore, the tracking is shifted in the outer peripheral direction. When this is defined as T ₁ = + _1, the physical position 539b in T ₂ = -1 address A _2. Since this information can be determined at the time of creating the master or after the creation of the master, the reference physical arrangement table 532 is created, encrypted, and recorded on the medium 2.

Next, in the illegally duplicated medium 2 shown in FIG. 253 (b), no normal tracking displacement is added. Even if the tracking displacement is added, as shown in the figure, the tracking displacements T ′ ₁ and T ′ ₂ of the addresses A ₁ and A ₂ in the same angular zone Z ₁ are, for example, O ₁ +1 respectively. The arrangement table 556 is different from the reference physical arrangement table 532 of the regular disk. Therefore, the output / operation stop unit 536 detects the output of the program, the operation of the program, or the decryption of the application program by the second encryption decoder 534b is stopped by the detection unit 535 of the disk check unit 533 in FIG. A display indicating “illegal copy disk” is output to the display unit 16. In the case of FIG. 249, since the disk check program itself is encrypted by the second encryption decoder 534b, it is difficult to falsify the disk check program 533, and the effect of preventing unauthorized copying can be improved.

Next, the pit depth detection unit will be described. As shown in FIG. 249, the optical reproduction signal from the optical head 6 is sent to a fluctuation in the amplitude or modulation degree of the envelope or the like of the pit depth detection unit 555, or to the amplitude amount detection unit 555a such as a multi-level level slicer. The pit depth is detected based on the change in amplitude, and the detection output D′ n is sent to the collating unit 535 and collated with the data in the reference physical arrangement table 532. If they are different, a copy protection operation is started. Thus, as shown in FIGS. 254 (a), (b), (c), and (d), the four check parameters of the address An, the angle Zn, the tracking displacement amount Tn, and the pit depth Dn are the physical arrangement 539a and 539b of one sample point. , 539c, it is necessary to duplicate a master disc in which the conditions of the four parameters match at all sample points. It is difficult to duplicate a master that satisfies such conditions with good yield. Therefore, strong copy protection is realized. In particular, it is extremely difficult to duplicate a group of pits having the same pit depth after changing the width, and the yield is poor, so that it is not economically feasible. In the case of the present invention, as shown in FIG. 269, in step 584a, for example, 1000 sets of pit groups are recorded on the same master under 1000 different sets of recording conditions such as recording output and pulse width. With fractional distillation, for example, with a fractional distillation of 1/200, there are pit groups that pass five conditions. In step 564c, the physical arrangement and the like of the passed pit group are found by monitoring the master disk with laser light. In step 584d, a physical arrangement table of the accepted pit group is created, and in step 584e, the physical arrangement table is encrypted. If it is an optical recording unit in step 584f, this encryption is recorded in the second photosensitive section 572a of the master in step 584g. In step 584h, plastic is injected into the master to form an optical disk, a reflective film is formed in step 584i, and if there is no magnetic layer in step 584j, the magnetic layer is completed. If there is, a magnetic recording unit is created in step 584k. Then, the encryption is recorded on the magnetic recording section, and the optical disk is completed. Since the pit depth is measured after the master is created, and the pit depth is encrypted and recorded in the arrangement table, the yield at the time of creating the master can be increased to nearly 100%.

Here, a method of detecting the pit depth in the pit depth detection unit 555 will be described. The pits 561a to 561f of the illegally copied disk in FIG. 250A have the same pit depth. Among the pits of the regular disk shown in FIG. 250 (b), the pits 560c, d, and e are shallow. Therefore, the reproduction pulse 562c as shown in FIG. 250 (c), d, e will have low peak value, the reference slice level S ₀ multilevel slicer 555b, but it is output as shown in FIG. 250 (f), detection in use the slice level S _1, no output as shown in FIG. 250 (d). Therefore, by taking the logical product of the inverse value of S ₁ and S ₀ , the duplication prevention signals 563c, 563d, and 563e are obtained only in the case of a regular disk as shown in FIG. The illegal disk, since the output of the detection slice level S ₁ is set to 1 in succession, the anti-duplication signal is not output. Therefore, a duplicate disk can be detected. It should be noted that in this case, FIG. 250 a reduction in envelope Fuhaba reduce or modulation factor of the optical output waveform as shown in (e) is detected by Fuhaba amount detecting unit 555a, the opposite sign to obtain even the same effect of S ₁ Is obtained.

比較 As is clear from the comparison table of the anti-duplication effect shown in FIG. 256, a normal CD or MD master disc producing device does not have an angle control function, so that disc checking in the angular direction, that is, A is effective. On the other hand, the laser beam (LD), MD or CD ROM master making apparatus has no means for controlling the wobbling, that is, the tracking direction, so that the displacement in the tracking direction, ie, B, is effective. On the other hand, the depth direction, ie, C, cannot be detected by an existing CD IC because an input circuit requires a circuit for detecting the amplitude or the degree of modulation in addition to the conventional circuit. Therefore, at present, A + B is the most effective combination for CD and MD because A + B has a high copy protection effect and is compatible with existing ICs. It can be seen that a check method combining A + B, that is, a combination of two parameters, the angle direction and the tracking direction, is the most effective in the current master disc preparation apparatus.

FIG. 257 shows an apparatus for producing a master disk of a disc in which modulation is performed in the angular direction, the track direction, and the pit depth direction. The mastering device 529 shown in FIG. 257 has basically the same configuration and operation as the mastering device shown in FIG. First, the tracking modulation method will be described. The system control unit includes a tracking modulation signal generation unit 564 which sends a modulation signal to the tracking control unit 24 and performs tracking with a substantially constant radius r ₀ based on the reference track pitch 24a. Modulation such as wobbling is applied within the range of r ₀ ± dr of the radius of this track. Therefore, a meandering track as shown in FIGS. 253 (a) and 253 (b) is created on the master 572. This tracking displacement amount is sent to the tracking displacement information section 32g of the position information input section 32b. In the copy prevention signal generation unit 565, a reference physical arrangement table 532 in which the address An, the angle Zn, the tracking displacement amount Tn, and the pit depth Dn described in FIG. 246 are tabulated is created, and encrypted by the encryption encoder 537. Is done. This code is recorded on the second master 572a provided on the outer periphery of the master as shown in FIGS. 265 and 266, or on the second master provided on the outer periphery as shown in FIGS. 267 and 268. Further, the modulation Dn in the pit depth direction can also be independently added. The system control unit 10 of FIG. 257 includes an optical output modulation signal generation unit 566, and the amplitude of the laser output of the output modulation unit 567 of the optical recording unit 37b is changed as shown in FIG. The effective value of the laser output can be changed by modulating the pulse width or the pulse interval with a constant amplitude by the pulse width modulator 568 as in a). Then, as shown in FIG. 263 (c), photosensitive portions 574 having different depths are formed on the photosensitive portions 573 of the master 572. As a result of the etching step, pits 560a to 560e having different depths are formed as shown in FIG. 263 (d). Pits of shallow pits 560b and 560e are formed. By applying a metal plating such as nickel to the master 572, a metal master 575 as shown in FIG. 263 (e) is obtained, and a molded disk 576 is obtained by plastic molding. When the pit is formed on the master by changing the amplitude of the laser output in this way, the peak value of the reproduction output decreases as shown in the waveform diagram of waveform (5) in FIG. In the case of slicing, the pulse width is detected to be narrower than a pit having a deep pit depth, and a normal digital output cannot be obtained. Therefore, a pulse having a wide width of T + ΔT is generated by the pulse width adjusting section 569 for the original signal of the synchronization T as shown in the waveform (1) of FIG. 264 as shown in the waveform (2). By doing so, the digital signal is corrected as shown in the waveform (6). If no correction is made, a sliced digital output narrower than the original signal is obtained as shown in the waveform (7), and an erroneous digital signal is output.

Thus, the pit depth is modulated by the light output modulation section 567, and the pit depth information Dn is sent from the light output modulation signal generation section 566 to the pit depth information section 32h. A reference physical arrangement table 532 in which Zn, Tn, and Dn are tabulated is created, encrypted by the encryption encoder 537, and magnetically recorded on the magnetic recording layer. Alternatively, as shown in the step of FIG. 267, after the unexposed portion 577 provided on the outer periphery of the master is prepared, the pit depth and the like are measured as shown in the step 5, the physical arrangement table is obtained and encrypted, and in the step 6, By recording this code on the second photosensitive section 577, the physical layout table 532 can be recorded together with the program software on one master as shown in steps 7, 8, and 9. If a different ID number is not required for each disk, a magnetic layer is not necessarily required, and this method can provide a copy protection effect only by the optical recording unit. FIG. 268 shows a top view and a cross-sectional view of the master. 265 and 266, two masters may be bonded together. In FIG. 257, an external communication interface unit 588 is provided, and as shown in FIG. 262, an external encryption encoder 579 owned by the copyright holder of the external software encrypts the physical layout table with the first encryption key 32d and encrypts the physical arrangement table. From the external encryption encoder 579 to the mastering device 529 of the optical disk manufacturing company via the second communication interface 578a, the communication line and the communication interface 578. In this method, the copyright holder's first encryption key 32d is not passed on to the optical disk manufacturer, so that the encryption security is improved and the optical disk manufacturer is liable even if the first encryption key 32d is stolen by a third party. There is an effect that it is not necessary to bear.

In addition, precise processing control in the depth direction of the optical pits involves many variations in sensitivity and gamma characteristics of photosensitive materials, fluctuations in laser light output and beam shape, thermal characteristics of glass substrates, etching characteristics, dimensional errors of molding presses, etc. Quite difficult because of the factors involved. For example, as shown in FIG. 255, when trying to change the combination of the pulse width and the depth of the pit, the optimum conditions of the laser output amplitude and the pulse width are different for each pulse width. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 255, n combination conditions in which the output value of the laser output and the pulse width are variously changed in consideration of the gamma characteristic are created. For example, if a combination of several hundred laser outputs is made and a master is made several hundred times differently, the depth of each pit is optimized several times. That is, several of the hundreds of masters can be passed. When the signal is reproduced, a pit group that reaches the reference voltage S ₀ and does not reach the detection voltage S ₁ is formed on the acceptable master when the signal is reproduced, as shown by the waveforms 581 a and 581 c of the waveform (3) in FIG. Will be. However, creating hundreds of useless masters for one piece of software requires an expenditure of tens of millions of yen, and is not economically feasible. Therefore, in the present invention, a method of creating an optimum pit in one master production is used. As shown in FIG. 263, several hundred sets of pit groups of 580a to 580d are provided as shown in FIG. Record under conditions. Then, a pit group having a pit depth, a pit shape, and a pulse width that passes the target condition with a probability of several out of n sets, for example, several out of several hundred sets is obtained. As shown in FIG. 248, the physical arrangement table 532 of the passed pit group 580c is encrypted to optically record the magnetic recording portion of the disk 2 and the second master and the master 572 of the second photosensitive portion shown in FIGS. 266 and 268. If it is recorded in the section, a copy protection disk using the pit depth is obtained. In this case, the number of n sets of pit groups increases as the yield of the acceptable pit groups decreases, but the copy protection ability increases accordingly. In reality, the number of combinations is increased by increasing the total number of pits and the types of pulse widths of one set of the pit group 560, and the yield can be reduced to about several hundredths. Since the physical layout table 532 is encrypted by the one-way function as described above, it cannot be falsified unless the encryption key is known. Therefore, a duplicator cannot duplicate unless he makes several hundred masters that cost 100,000 yen or more. In other words, tens of millions of yen are required to obtain one copy master, which is economically insignificant, and the duplicator gives up copying, thereby preventing the duplication. On the other hand, even if hundreds of 10-bit pit groups are provided and 100 sets of these pit groups are produced, the total capacity is several tens of KB. For example, the effect on the CD-ROM capacity of 640 MB is 1/10000. The effect of the present invention is that there is almost no capacity reduction.

In the figure, an example using a ROM disk such as a CD has been described. However, the same applies when a physical layout table is encrypted and recorded on a recording layer portion of an optical RAM using a recordable optical disk such as a partial ROM. The effect of is obtained. In addition, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 270, the disk check program 584 may be arranged at, for example, 1000 places at various places such as a program installation routine 584d in a program 586 in the application software, a print routine 584e, a save routine 584f, and the like. Therefore, the desk check program 585 cannot be falsified or deleted unless the entire application program is decrypted, so that even if some of the disk check programs 585 are omitted, the operation is stopped by other remaining check programs. By distributing and arranging a plurality of disk check programs in this manner, there is an effect that unauthorized duplication becomes more difficult.

(Example 18)
The eighteenth embodiment implements a copy guard function in the case of software that installs software on a specific plurality of personal computers, such as an OS or a general personal computer program.

FIG. 149 shows a block diagram and is similar to FIG. State the differences to avoid duplication. First, the maximum number of personal computers on which the disk can be installed is recorded in the optical mark portion 387 or the high Hc portion 401 of the disk, and this data is added to the Disk ID No. of the key management table. (OPT) or Disk ID No. (Mag) data. For example, “ID = 204312001, N ₁ = 5, N ₂ = 3” is stored. This means that “Disk ID is“ 20403121 ”and the maximum number of installed models of the first program is five, and the maximum number of installed models of the second program is three”. As shown in the figure, when the program 1 is installed in the first personal computer 408 of "xxx11", the key release decoder 406 sends data because five out of five tables of Program1 remain, and the external interface A program such as an OS is installed on the hard disk 409 of the first personal computer 408 via the unit 14. At this time, the device ID No. "XXX11" is sent to the CDROM drive 1a, and this data is stored in the key management table 404 at the location of n = 1 in Program1 and then recorded on the magnetic track 67 of the CDROM.

Next, the key management table 404 is checked in the same way as when the OS or the like is to be installed in the second personal computer 408a of "xxx23" using the CDROM 2a. Then, since it is understood that four computers can still be installed, the installation starts. Is recorded on the magnetic track 67. In this way, up to five personal computers can be installed. However, when trying to install an OS or the like on another sixth personal computer, there is not enough room in the column of Program1, so a new personal computer ID No. Cannot be recorded and installation is prevented. In this way, the software can be installed only on the number of personal computers paid for by the software maker, thereby preventing unauthorized copying of the software. On the other hand, if the legally installed PC software breaks and needs to be reinstalled, the machine ID No. Has already been registered as one out of five devices, so that there is an effect that it can be installed any number of times. Disk @ IDNo. Since the recording is performed in two different processes, ie, the high-Hc recording section 401 and the optical mark 387, the duplication requires cost and labor, and the duplication prevention effect is enhanced.

This method, that is, this program will be described in more detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In step 410a, the program No. N installation command is issued. First, in step 410b, the machine ID No. For example, "xxx11" is read. Next, the CDROM 2a is set in the CDROM drive 1a. In step 410c, the magnetic data is sent to the memory of the personal computer 408, and the key management table 404 is created. In step 410e, the program No. N registered in the column of the machine ID No. N Is read, and the machine ID No. of the personal computer to be installed in step 410f is read. It is checked whether they match with each other. If Yes, the process proceeds to step 410q. If No, the process proceeds to step 410g. Check if you can afford to register. Specifically, if five devices can be installed, it checks how many devices can be installed later. If No, the process proceeds to step 410n and installation is naturally prevented, and the process stops at step 410P. If Yes, at step 410h, the machine ID No. of the personal computer to be installed is set. Is registered in the table 404. Then the number of remaining PCs that can be installed decreases. At step 410c, this machine ID No. Is recorded on the magnetic track 67 by the magnetic head. The installation starts in step 410j, and if the installation is successful in step 410k, stops in step 410p. If it fails, the ID number of the personal computer to be installed in step 410m. Is deleted from the magnetic track, and the process stops at step 410p.

(Example 19)
In the eighteenth embodiment, the exchange of data between the personal computer 408 and the CDROM drive 1a has been described. In the nineteenth embodiment, the configuration and operation of the interface between the personal computer and the CDROM drive will be described in detail.

と Except for the interface, it operates basically the same as a conventional computer. As shown in the block diagram of the personal computer and the CD ROM drive in FIG. 151, an application 412 of a program such as WP software in the software unit 411 of the personal computer 408 exchanges information with a kernel unit 414 for managing the system via a shell unit 413. I do. The kernel section 414 stores the MSDOS. OS 415 in a narrow sense such as SYS and IO. It comprises an input / output control system 416 such as SYS. The input / output control system 416 has a device such as a hard disk and a device driver 417 for inputting / outputting the device. In the case of the figure, the external storage device is composed of a BIOS 419 and a SCSI, which are generally defined by four drivers A, B, C, and D, each of which is logically defined by 417a, 417b, 417c, and 417d, and is usually composed of hardware such as ROMIC. The personal computer and the interfaces 14 and 424 of the external storage devices such as the HDD 409, the CDROM 2a, and the FDD 426 are physically connected to each other via an interface 420 such as an external device, and input / output data between them. The above operation is the same as the conventional method. The interface between the HDD 409 and the FDD 426 is the same as the conventional one.

In the case of a conventional CDROM drive or optical disk drive, one drive is physically defined and one drive is logically defined. However, in the case of the CDROM drive 1a having the magnetic recording unit of the present invention, two drivers A, ie, a driver 418a and a B driver 418b, are defined in the input / output control system 416. The driver A reproduces, but does not record, the data of the logically defined optical recording file 421 via the interface 14 in the CDROM drive 1a. Physically, as described in the previous embodiment, the data of the optical recording layer 4 dedicated for reproduction on the optical disk is read by the optical reproducing unit 7 and transmitted to the personal computer 408 via the driver A. The driver B records and reproduces data of the magnetic recording file 422 logically defined in the same manner. Physically, data is recorded / reproduced on / from the magnetic recording layer 3 of the optical disk 2 by the magnetic recording / reproducing unit 9, and data is input / output to / from the personal computer 408 via the device driver 417 as a driver B 418 b.

In the case of this embodiment, two drivers 417a and 418b are defined for one CD-ROM drive with RAM 1a. Accordingly, when the OS 415 performs multitasking, the personal computer 408 can record or reproduce the magnetic file 422 while reproducing the optical recording file 421. There is an effect that processing can be performed at high speed. This is particularly effective when a virtual file described later is used.

(5) Next, a method of physically performing the above-described simultaneous processing will be described. The first method is described. First, FIG. 152 shows the optical address table 433 and the magnetic data table 434 of the CDROM 2a with RAM. For the CDROM, all data in the optical address table 440 has the write inhibit flag set, while all data in the magnetic address table 441 is writable unless specified. As described above, the CDROM drive 1a of the present invention reads in frequently used data into the drive memory 34a in advance when the CDROM 2a is inserted. Therefore, the addresses of necessary data in the magnetic address table 441 are arranged in the magnetic address table, for example, in the magnetic data 442 of the physical address 00 in order of use frequency. Therefore, when the disk is inserted, the magnetic data at address 00 is read out and transferred to the drive memory 34a composed of an IC memory in the necessary data order. Thus, at the time of recording / reproducing the magnetic data of the CDROM, it is only necessary to physically access and record / reproduce the data of the drive memory 34a of the IC memory. For this reason, it is possible to read and write the magnetic file 422 in the drive memory 34a at the same time as reproducing the optical data by the optical reproducing unit 7 by simultaneously executing the time division processing of the CPU of the system control unit IO. Therefore, the recording / reproduction of the magnetic recording layer 3 of the CDROM 2a can be physically performed only once, so that the recording surface is less damaged. The contents of the drive memory 34a are retained by the memory backup unit 433 even when the power of the CDROM drive 1a is turned off. Therefore, regardless of whether the power is on or off, the changed magnetic recording data in the drive memory 34a is selected only when the CDROM 2a is ejected, and recorded on the magnetic recording layer 3 from when the disc is inserted until it is ejected. The maximum number of times is one, which has the effect of extending the life. Enables parallel file processing and increases transfer speed. This drive memory a retains its stored contents even when the power of the CDROM drive 1a is turned off by the memory backup unit 433. Therefore, there is no need to read the magnetic data in the CDROM unless the CDROM is replaced even when the power is turned on again.

In this case, by providing the data compression / decompression unit 435 described in FIG. 125 in the system control unit 10 of the CDROM drive 1a, the substantial capacity of the magnetic file 422 can be increased.

Next, a case where the CDROM drive of the present invention is treated as one drive will be described. Since the operation is basically the same as in the case of the two drives, the duplicated description will be omitted.

As shown in the block diagram of FIG. 153, the CDROM with RAM of the present invention can be handled as one drive, for example, the A drive 418 in the input / output control system 416 of the personal computer 408. In this case, even a single-task OS can read and write data in the CD-ROM drive with RAM 1a. As for the file configuration, as shown in the address table of FIG. 154, continuous addresses are assigned to the optical file 421 and the magnetic file 422, and the optical data table 440 and the magnetic data table 441 are treated as one file. Until "01251", CDROM data is allocated and all write-protection flags are set. After the logical address “01252”, magnetic data is allocated and a writable flag is set.

Then, when viewed from the personal computer side, the optical data can be reproduced as one disk, and the magnetic data can be recorded and reproduced. In this case, too, since the logical address “01252” is the address of the frequently used magnetic data, the data of the magnetic recording layer 3 corresponding to this address is stored in the CDROM 2a as shown in the block diagram of FIG. After the insertion, the data is moved to the magnetic file 422 of the drive memory 34a via the magnetic recording / reproducing unit 9 and the data compression / decompression unit 435, so that there is almost no need to physically read the data of the magnetic recording layer 3 thereafter. The recording and reproduction of the magnetic data is virtually performed by rewriting the data in the IC memory of the drive memory 34a. This is because magnetic data is small, for example, 32 KB, so that it can be stored even in an IC memory having a small capacity. This extends the life of the disk and speeds up access and I / O. As described above, physical magnetic data is recorded only when the disk is ejected. The other operations are the same as those in the above-described two-drive system, and will not be described. In the case of the one-drive system, the system configuration is simplified.

Next, a method for efficiently reproducing data from the magnetic recording layer 3 and reproducing data from the optical recording layer 4 will be described. In order not to reduce the transfer speed of the CDROM, it is desirable to reproduce the magnetic recording layer during the reproduction time of the optical recording layer. Further, it is most important to shorten the rise time when inserting the CDROM. First, the file configuration of the present embodiment will be described using the file structure address table of FIG. As shown in the figure, the CDROM with magnetic recording layer 2a is composed of an optical file 421 and a small-capacity magnetic file 422, each having an optical address table 440, and separate physical optical addresses and magnetic addresses. Then, as shown in the cross-sectional view of the optical disk of FIG. 155, magnetic drives 67a, 67b, 67c, 67d, 67d, 67e, 67f are arranged behind the optical addresses A, B, C, D, E, F. Addresses a, b, c, d, e, and f correspond to each other. This correspondence is recorded in the magnetic TOC unit 442 of the magnetic address 00 together with the frequency management data described above. The system control unit 10 in FIG. 153 has a one-address link table 443 indicating the physical position of the optical address and the magnetic address in the drive memory 34a. As shown in FIG. 154 (b), the link information of the two addresses is recorded in the contents.

Now, a method for simultaneously reproducing magnetic data and optical data simultaneously will be described. When a minimum program is started by inserting a CDROM, the minimum optical data is reproduced. The minimum magnetic data necessary for starting the program, for example, individual score data and progress data of the game software may be recorded on the magnetic track just behind the optical track of the optical data to be reproduced.

This operation will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

At step 444a, an initial value of m = 0 is set, and at step 444b, m = m + 1. In step 444c, it is checked whether m is the final value. If Yes, the process jumps to step 444m. If No, the process proceeds to step 444d to reproduce the optical data of the m-th optical address A (m). Next, in step 444e, a subroutine for searching for an optical track corresponding to the optical address A (m) among the optical tracks corresponding to the magnetic tracks is entered. In this subroutine, n = 0 in step 444f, n = n + 1 in step 444g, it is checked whether n is the final value in step 444w, and if Yes, it jumps to step 444m; if "No", it jumps to step 444h in the nth step At 444h, the optical address M (n) on the back side of the nth magnetic address is read from the address link table 443, and at step 444i, for example, a check of M (n) +10 is performed to check whether this optical address is in the vicinity. If No, the process returns to step 444g to check the optical address of the next magnetic track. If Yes, the magnetic head is lowered to the magnetic recording layer 3 in Step 444j, and the reproduction of the data of the magnetic address n and the fixation of the optical traverse are performed during this time. In Step 444k, it is checked whether the reproduction of the magnetic data is completed. Is executed again, and if Yes, the process returns to step 444b, and the number of m is increased by one again. Repeat the above operation. However, if m is a completion value, the process jumps to step 444m to check whether reproduction of all the magnetic tracks containing magnetic data necessary for starting a program such as a game has been completed, and if completed in step 444, the process proceeds to step 444v. If NO, the subroutine 444p for reproducing the remaining n ₀ magnetic tracks is entered to reproduce the remaining magnetic magnetic data. This subroutine will be described. In step 444q, n = 0, in step 444r, n = n + 1, and in step 444s, whether n is completed is checked. If Yes, the process jumps to step 444v. If No, the corresponding optical address of the nth magnetic address is set. And the magnetic data is reproduced in step 444u, and the process returns to step 444r, where n = n + 1, and the same operation is repeated unless completed. Upon completion, the process jumps to step 444v, and the reproduction operation of the initial rising data of the program is completed.

From this flowchart, it is possible to shorten the time for starting the program by recording the minimum magnetic data required for the start of the program, that is, the ILP, on the magnetic track behind the optical track of the optical data. In this case, as shown in FIG. 154, selecting the magnetic tracks on the back side of the various optical tracks in this way means that the magnetic tracks are not always arranged at equal intervals. Therefore, by using the above-described variable-pitch magnetic track of the present invention, the program start-up time can be reduced.

Also, as shown by the magnetic TOC 442 in FIG. 154, by recording the optical address of the optical track on the back side of each magnetic track 01, 02,. By arranging the magnetic tracks in the order of use frequency described above, frequency management data can be omitted, and there is an effect that a substantial capacity is increased.

(Example 20)
In a twentieth embodiment, a method of correcting a program bag of CDROM software using the CDROM 1a will be disclosed.

バ グ As shown in the file data table of FIG. 157 (b), the bug correction program 455 is recorded in the optical file section 421 of the CDROM 1a having a capacity of 540 MB. In the remaining part, a program such as an OS is recorded as ROM data. The magnetic file 422 is approximately 32 KB in the case of the present invention. Here, only the bug correction data 446 having a small capacity is recorded. No fix has been recorded. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 157 (b), correction data, correction contents, and optical addresses of optical ROM data to be corrected are entered. As shown in FIG. 157 (c), only a specific file having a bug in the OS or the like is read into the memory 34, and corrected data 448 is output by the bug correction program 447 and the bug correction data 46. The specific procedure will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 157 (a). First, when a specific file having a bug is read in step 445a, all the specific files are moved to the memory 34. In step 445b, N = 0, in step 445c, N is incremented by one, and in step 45d, the Nth bug correction data of the corresponding specific file is read out. In step 445e, it is checked whether the address has not been changed. Is corrected, if No, the line is deleted in step 445h, the logical address of the optical file is changed in step 445j, and the process proceeds to step 445k. If No, go to step 445k. In step 445k, it is checked whether a line is to be added. If No, the process proceeds to step 445p. If Yes, a line is added in steps 445m and 445n, the logical address of the optical file is changed, and the process proceeds to step 445p. In step 445p, it is checked whether or not there is any other processing. If No, the flow proceeds to step 445r. If Yes, other processing is performed in step 445q. Complete the modification and output the modified specific file. In the case of the present embodiment, the correction program is recorded in the optical ROM section in advance, and the correction data is recorded in the magnetic file 422 at the time of shipment, so that there is a great effect that bug correction of the OS or the like can be performed after manufacturing the optical disk. Further, a correction program is recorded in the optical ROM section. Therefore, only the correction data needs to be recorded in the magnetic file 422 having a small capacity. Therefore, there is an effect that a larger amount of correction data can be recorded.

(Example 21)
In a twenty-first embodiment, a method of correcting bug data in a CDROM in real time when reading a file such as a dictionary will be described.

光 As shown in FIG. 158 (b), an optical ROM data modification table 446 is recorded in the magnetic file 422, and modified data corresponding to the optical address is recorded. As shown in FIG. 158 (c), each data of the optical file 421 is corrected in real time by the correction program 447 in the optical file 421 and the correction data of the magnetic file 422, and output as corrected data 448.

This flow will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 158 (a). The file data correction program 447 receives a read command of specific optical data in step 447a, and sets N to the start number of the optical address of the data to be read in step 447b. The N in step 447c is incremented by one number, at step 447e reads the data of the optical address N in step 447d checks whether the k ₁ to k _M light address modification table 446. If No, the process proceeds to step 447g. If Yes, the data of the optical address N is corrected based on the correction table in step 447f, and in the next step 44g, it is checked whether all necessary optical data has been read. If No, the process returns to Step 447c, and if Yes, the process proceeds to Step 447h to output corrected optical data. In the case of the present embodiment, the data is corrected and output in units of optical addresses, so that there is an effect that the data is output in real time. Therefore, it is effective in the case of outputting data in small units such as dictionary CDROM software. Assuming that each correction data has an average of, for example, 10B, the CDROM 1a of the present invention has a magnetic recording area of about 32 KB, so that 3,000 corrections are possible. Therefore, it is suitable for modifying CDROM software of a dictionary. In the case of a dictionary, a new function can be added by using the magnetic recording layer 3 for recording frequently used data and marking important data, so that the dictionary is highly effective.

(Example 22)
In the above-described embodiment, a method has been disclosed in which the data of the magnetic file 422 is expanded substantially several times by the data compression / decompression program.

In the twenty-second embodiment, focusing on the current situation in which the hard disk 425 is standardized like a recent WINDOWS personal computer, a large-capacity file is physically defined on the hard disk 425, and this large-capacity file is logically stored in the magnetic file 422. A method for logically increasing the capacity of the magnetic file 422 by using the virtual memory method as described in the above will be described. In this case, the basic configuration and operation are the same as in the case of FIG. 153, and a duplicate description will be omitted. Machine ID = Ap PC 408 and CDROM drives 1a and the disc ID = A _H of HDD425 or disk ID = B _H of DD or replace optical disc 428 of the optical disc, as shown in the block diagram of FIG. 159 is physically via the interface It is connected to the. The magnetic file 422 can be connected to the personal computer 408a with the machine ID = Bp via the application program 412, the network OS 431, the network BIOS 436, the communication port 432, the LAN network 437 such as TOPIP, and is directly connected to the personal computer 408a. both hard disk 405a of the disc ID = C _D has become connectable. Therefore, virtual large-capacity disks of the magnetic file 422 of this embodiment can be physically set at three places: the hard disk 425 and the replacement disk 428 of the personal computer 408 and the hard disk 425a of another personal computer 408a. These are called virtual disks 450, 450a and 450b, respectively, and are indicated by hatched portions in the figure.

(4) By using the virtual disk 450, for example, the capacity of the magnetic file 422 capable of recording only 32 kB per CDROM is virtually increased to 100 MB or 10 GB. HDDs are indispensable in recent Windows personal computers, and most personal computers have a network function in offices. In this embodiment, a virtual large-capacity memory space can be obtained even if the CDROM 1a of most personal computers in this embodiment is inserted using the free space of the hard disk of the personal computer and the network function.

Next, a specific data structure will be described with reference to the file data structure diagram of FIG.

The CDROM 1a includes a physically existing optical file 421, a magnetic file 422, and a virtual file 450 logically defined. Actual data of the virtual file 450 is recorded in the physical file 451 in the HDD 425, the exchangeable disk 428, and the physical file HDD 425a of another personal computer 408a shown in the figure. The magnetic file section 422 of the CDROM 1a records a virtual directory entry 452 containing link information of the virtual file 450 and the physical file 451 and directory information such as the name and attribute of each virtual file. The virtual directory entry 452 includes: 1: an address 438 in the magnetic file; 2: a connection program number 453 containing the number of a communication program containing a command for connecting to another personal computer via the LAN; ID of the personal computer or drive connected to the disk containing the physical file 451 ID 454 containing the ID of the physical file 451, the disk ID 455 containing the ID number of the disk containing the physical file 451, the file name 456 of the virtual file 450, 6: the extension 457, 7: the type of the virtual file. Attribute 458, 8: Reserved area 459, 9: Change time 460, indicating the file change date and time, 10: Start cluster number 461, indicating the cluster number at which the file starts, 11: From 11 items of attribute data of file size 462 It is configured. Of these, items 5 to 11 are almost the same as directories used in OSs such as MSDOS, and are usually composed of 32 bytes. All items are 48 to 64 bytes.

Now, as shown in the magnetic file table 422a, the magnetic file 422 contains the same number of virtual directory entries 452 as the number of virtual files. FIG. 160 shows only items 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 10 in relation to the drawings.

First, in the first virtual directory entry 452a, "A _N " is entered in the connection program number 453 of item 2. Next, looking at the sub-machine ID No. 454 of item 3, it can be seen that the machine ID in which the physical file 451 is stored is Ap. Since the case of FIG CDROM1a is connected to the CDROM drive computer machine ID = Ap, start the connection program A _N connecting the LAN it can be seen that there is no need to access other computer disk. When the main machine ID454 is another computer, start a connection program A _N, connected to the computer's LAN address of the main machine ID454, to access the disk 425a. Since almost all of the directory information is recorded in the link data 452, it is not necessary to access the physical file 451 when viewing the directory on the personal computer side. I just need. Therefore, there is an effect that access to the physical file is reduced by the link data 452.

Thus, when the physical file 451 is reached, a sub-virtual directory entry 467 in a normal format is recorded in the directory 463 of the physical file as shown in the directory area table 465. In this data, items 5 to 11 out of items 1 to 11 of the main virtual directory entry 452 are recorded. On the other hand, in the sub-reservation area 468 of the item 8, the main disk ID of the original main CDROM having the virtual file 450, the user ID 470 for setting the virtual file 450, the memorization number 471 for each file, and the last main Data such as the main machine ID 472 of the personal computer is added as compared with the virtual directory entry 452. The added data is recorded to confirm the association between the virtual file 450 and the physical file 451 from the physical file 451 side. If the check indicates that the association is low, the OS does not permit writing. In addition, in the attribute 458 of item 7, a reproduction-only code “01H” is recorded in the case of MSDOM in order to prohibit normal writing related to the virtual file 450. Therefore, recording is not possible in principle. When data is recorded in the virtual file 450, information such as the CDROM ID 469 of the virtual file 450 and the changeable sub-460 is sent to the input / output control system of the personal computer. It is checked that this data coincides with the sub-file link data 467, and if it is OK, IOSSYS of the kernel unit permits writing to the physical file 451 and recording is executed. When data is added to “File @ A”, the contents of FAT 466 are added as in, for example, FAT 466a by looking at the directory 463 of the physical file 451, and the additional data of “File @ A” is physically recorded in a new data area. I do. In this case, the data of the file size 462 of the virtual directory entry and the directory entry 467 of the physical file and the virtual file is rewritten to, for example, “5600 KB” because the file size becomes larger than before recording.

(4) The data of the physical file 451 corresponding to the virtual file 450 can be recorded and reproduced. Since all the operations realized by the virtual file 450 are performed by the OS, the input / output OS, and the network OS, the user can treat the magnetic recording unit 3 of the CDROM 1a as if a physical file of, for example, 5600 KB exists.

The virtual file 450 and the physical file 451 of several tens of KB to several GB are linked from one data of the virtual directory entry 452 of about $ 48B, and data can be physically recorded and reproduced. Therefore, even if the magnetic file 422 of the present invention attached to the CDROM 1a has a small capacity of only 32 KB, 500 to 1000 virtual directories 452, that is, 500 to 1000 virtual files 450 can be virtually recorded and reproduced. it can. With 10 MB per file, there is a remarkable effect that a virtual RAM disk capacity of about 5 GB can be obtained.

In, a method for realizing a virtual file for CDROM will be described based on a flowchart. First, a method of reproducing a virtual file will be described using the virtual file reproduction routine flowchart of FIG.

Suppose that an instruction to call the file "X" has been received in step 481a. In the next step 481b, it is checked whether or not only the contents of the directory information are sufficient. If Yes, the virtual directory entry in the magnetic file 422 is read. As shown by the character 496a, only the directory contents such as the file name or directory name, file size, creation date and time are displayed on the screen of the personal computer.

Here we explain the screen display.

表示 In FIG. 164 (a), display characters 495b and 495c indicate that a 10 MB still image file 1GB moving image file recordable virtual file 450 is logically present in drive A, that is, CDROM 1a with RAM. It looks as if the operator has a large recordable file. Of course, a 540 MB CDROM file for reproduction or the like is also displayed in the display characters 496d, and a display character 496e of "a total of four files" is also displayed. In this embodiment, the personal computer has a 20 GB hard disk. The virtual disk set capacity VMAX of the virtual disk for one CDROM 1a is recorded in the sub disk ID column of the default main machine ID 474 in FIG. Here, either the physical file capacity of the sub-disk ID or the virtual disk set capacity is the maximum capacity that the virtual disk can record. The value obtained by subtracting the current used capacity of the virtual file from this value is the remaining recording capacity. In the case of FIG. 164 (a), a virtual file having a total capacity of 10 GB is set, and a 1020 MB virtual file is consumed. The screen indicates that there is a virtual file 450 having a capacity of 10,000 MB to 1020 MB and a remaining capacity of 8980 MB. A virtual file is indicated by a display character 496g. Since the symbol "V" is attached to the virtual file, it can be distinguished from other files.

As shown in the personal computer screen diagram of FIG. 165 and the block diagram of FIG. 151, when the driver of the CDROM 1a with RAM is divided into the A drive B drive, the ROM portion of the CDROM is displayed as display characters 496h, and the RAM portion of the CDROM is Since the ROM and the RAM are displayed separately like the display characters 496i and 496j, there is an effect that the operator is easy to handle. Further, in the case of multitask processing, since the ROM section and the RAM section can be read and written independently at the same time, there is an effect that the processing speed is increased. The process returns to step 481b of the flowchart in FIG. If No, proceed to Step 481e, check whether the current machine ID No. and the main machine ID number 454 recorded in the virtual directory entry 452 are the same. If No, go to Step 482a because there is no physical file in this personal computer. If Yes, the process proceeds to step 451f because the physical file 451 is present in the personal computer 408, reads the drive name of the physical file from the secondary disk ID 455, and checks whether the drive is operating. If No, a display instructing "power-on of drive ID" is displayed on the screen in Step 481g, and it is checked whether the corresponding drive has been operated in Step 481h. If No, STOP is performed in Step 481i, and if Yes, the process proceeds to Step 481j. In step 481j, it is checked whether a disk with the secondary disk ID 455 exists. If No, the process proceeds to step 481k, where it is determined whether or not the medium is an exchange medium such as a floppy disk or an optical disk by checking the exchange medium identifier in the sub disk ID. To display an "error" display on the screen and stop. If Yes, the display of "insert disk" of the secondary disk ID 455 appears on the screen in step 481m, and the process returns to step 481j. Returning to step 481j, if Yes, the process proceeds to step 481q, in which the directory area 465 of the disk having the secondary disk ID is searched for a corresponding file name 456. It is determined in step 481r that if No, an error display is issued in step 481p. If Yes, the information is collated in step 481s, and it is confirmed whether or not the physical file really corresponds to the virtual file. Specifically, the data in the virtual directory entry 452 and the data in the directory entry 467 are collated. Further, the disk ID of the CDROM is compared with the ID of the CDROM side main disk ID 469 in the directory entry 467. It also checks the modification time and file size. Does not check attributes. At step 481t, it is checked whether all items to be checked are the same. If No, an error is displayed at step 481u. If Yes, reading of physical data of the corresponding file "X" in the directory area 465 is started at step 481v. First, after waiting for the start cluster number “YYY” of the FAT, a cluster number following “FYY” of the FAT is read out in step 481 w, and necessary data among all the data of the above-mentioned cluster number in the data area is read out in step 481 x. read out. In the next step 481y, the reading of the file "X" is completed, and the virtual file 450 can obtain an arbitrary capacity value within the range of the hard disk capacity of the personal computer 408.

Now, returning to step 481e, if there is no physical file corresponding to the virtual file in the hard disk of the current personal computer, the processing skips to step 482a and starts the connection with the personal computer of the main machine ID containing the physical file of the child. I do. In this case, the connection routine 482 is handled by the network OS. First, the LAN address of the main machine ID is read from the item of the main machine ID of the virtual directory entry, the number of the connection program is read in step 482b, a predetermined network connection program is executed, and the above-mentioned LAN address is input and connection is attempted. . At step 482c, the connection is checked. If unsuccessful (No), an error is displayed at step 482d, and if successful (Yes), a corresponding file read command is transmitted to the sub personal computer 408a via a network such as a LAN.

From step 482g, the OS operation of the sub personal computer 408a starts. First, the data in the physical file is read in response to a file “X” read command from the main personal computer. This operation is exactly the same as the physical file data read subroutine 483 described above. Therefore, in step 483a, this subroutine is used in this subroutine 483a. At step 482h, completion of reading of the file is checked. If Yes, the data of the file is advanced to step 482j, the data of the file "X" is transmitted to the main personal computer 408, and the operation proceeds to step 482k. If No, the flow advances to step 482i to send an error message to the main personal computer, and the flow also advances to step 482k.

At step 482k, the connection routine 482 for the network OS of the main personal computer 480 is again executed via the LAN. At step 482k, the data of the corresponding file or the error message from the sub personal computer 408a is received, and at step 482m, it is checked whether it is an error message. If Yes, an error message is displayed at Step 482p. If No, the process proceeds to Step 482y, and the file reading operation ends.

Next, the procedure of the virtual file rewriting routine 485a will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As shown in FIG. 166 (a), a display character 496 appears on the screen. When the user issues a command to rewrite the data of the specific file “x” in step 485a, the virtual file of this specific file “x” is generated in step 485b. The directory entry 452 is read, and it is checked in step 485c whether this file has a recite number. If Yes, “password?” Is displayed on the screen as in the display character 496p of FIG. 166 (a) in step 486d. The operator inputs "123456" to the keyboard as indicated by the display character 496q, checks this number as the recitation number, and displays "error" on the screen at step 485e if No.

If "Yes", the flow proceeds to step 485g, and it is checked whether the physical file 451 exists in the personal computer machine. If the current machine ID matches the main machine ID 454, the process proceeds to step 485h if Yes, and proceeds to step 486a in the connection routine 488 for connecting to another personal computer via a network if No. If Yes, the process proceeds to step 485h of the physical file data rewriting subroutine 487, where the drive name of the sub-machine ID in the virtual directory entry 452 is taken out, and it is checked whether the drive of this drive name exists in the personal computer. If "No", as shown in FIG. 166 (b), the display character 496r of "Please turn on the drive power" is displayed on the screen at step 485i, and the presence or absence of the corresponding drive is checked at step 485i. To display an "error" display character 456s on the screen. If yes, proceed to step 485k. At step 485k, it is checked whether there is a disk having the same ID number as the driver's secondary disk ID 455. If No, the process jumps to step 485m to check the attribute of the exchange medium, and if Yes, displays "Please insert the exchange medium disk xx" in step 485n as shown in FIG. 166 (d), and returns to step 485k. If No, the process jumps to step 485j to display "error".

By the way, if step 485k is Yes, the directory area 465 in the disk with the secondary disk ID is read, and the corresponding file name 456 is searched and checked. If No, the process jumps to step 485j to display an error. If Yes, the process proceeds to step 485r, and it is checked whether this physical file is a real physical file of a virtual file. Specifically, it is checked whether the data other than the contents of the virtual directory entry 452 and the attribute data of the directory entry 467 are the same. In particular, the disk ID of the CDROM on the client side is compared with the main disk ID 469 on the CDROM included in the disk entry on the server side.

チ ェ ッ ク Check in step 485s, and if No, jump to step 485j and display "error". If Yes, the process proceeds to step 485t, and the system such as the OS temporarily erases the write-protected club such as the attribute data "01H" or "02H" in the directory entry of File @ x. This will allow memorization.

て も Even if you try to view these files from a virtual file other than the CDROM, you cannot see the file because it contains "invisible code", and of course you cannot modify it.

Thus, the virtual file is protected so that it can only be modified and viewed from the corresponding CDROM. In step 485u, it is checked whether there is free space in the disk where the physical file is located. If No, an error display in step 485j is performed. Then, in step 485w, a cluster number following this start cluster number is obtained from the FAT area 466. At step 485x, the data of all data areas of the corresponding cluster number is rewritten in the data area 473. If the new data has a larger capacity than the old data, the data is also recorded in the new cluster. Thus, data is actually recorded in the physical file 451.

(4) It is checked whether the process is completed in step 485y. If No, the process returns to step 485x. If Yes, the process proceeds to step 485z to rewrite the directory and FAT of the physical file 451. At this time, the “02H” invisible attribute (invisible) is recorded again in the attribute of the directory entry 467. In this way, as shown in the screen display diagram of the sub personal computer in FIG. 167, the entity of the physical file becomes visible to the operator, so that the virtual file 450 of the CDROM 1a cannot be rewritten except for the rewriting operation by the OS in principle. Therefore, there is an effect that data is prevented from being improperly rewritten. By setting the above-mentioned recitation number for each virtual file, data can be protected twice.

{Step 486n} and the data of the directory entry 467 is transferred to the virtual directory entry 452 of the magnetic file except for the attribute data. In this way, the contents of the two are completely the same, including the date and time, so that writing to the physical file 451 will be permitted by the collation work at the time of rewriting in the future. The work is ended in step 486p.

戻 り Here, returning to step 485g, if “No”, the process jumps to step 486a to start the LAN connection routine 488. First, the LAN address of the main machine ID having the physical file is read from the virtual directory entry 452. In step 486b, as shown in the network connection diagram of FIG. 168, a network such as a LAN is transmitted from the LAN address "B" of the main personal computer 408 currently loaded with the CDROM 1a to the sub personal computer 408a having the LAN address "A" of the main machine ID. A plurality of program numbers to be connected via the network are read out, a LAN address is input, and the connection program is executed one after another. In step 486c, the connection is checked. If the connection can be established by any of the programs, the process proceeds to step 486e of Yes. If No, the process proceeds to step 486d to display an error. In step 486e, a rewrite command for the physical file 451 and new data to be rewritten are transmitted to the sub personal computer 408a.

Next, the process proceeds to step 486f, and the operation is changed from the OS of the main personal computer to the operation of the network OS and the input / output control OS of the sub personal computer 408a. First, a rewrite command and rewrite data for the corresponding file are received, and in the next step, the above-described physical file data rewrite subroutine 487 is executed. In step 486g, it is checked whether or not the file data has been successfully rewritten. Then, the rewriting completion information and the latest data of the directory entry 467 of the physical file are transmitted to the main personal computer 408 via the network, and the process proceeds to step 486j which is the operation of the network OS of the main personal computer 408. Returning to step 486g, in the case of No, the process jumps to step 486i, transmits an error message to the main personal computer 408 via the network, and jumps to step 486j which is the operation of the main personal computer.

At step 486j, which is the operation of the network OS of the main personal computer 408, the data or error message of the directory entry 467 of the physical file 451 is received from the sub personal computer 408a. If there is no error message at step 486k, this directory entry 467 is received at step 486n. Based on the data such as the date, the virtual directory entry 452 of the virtual file 450 of the magnetic file of the CDROM is rewritten so as to be the same, and the rewriting operation is ended in step 486p. Returning to step 486k, if there is an error message, the process proceeds to 486m, and "error" is displayed on the screen.

Thus, as shown in the network connection diagram of FIG. 168, for example, the virtual file 450 of, for example, 10 GB of the CDROM 2a with RAM actually has only 32 KB of physical memory in the magnetic recording layer 3 of the optical disk 2, but the virtual memory of the present invention. By using the disk method, large files can be logically realized.

In some cases, the physical file 451 is defined on the HDD of the main personal computer 408, or may be the physical file 451 of the HDD of the sub personal computer 408a located at a remote place.

FIG. 220 shows the network connection diagram of FIG. 168 as a directory configuration diagram. An example is shown in which the computer A is defined as the main machine 408 and the computer B is defined as the sub machine 408a, and the hybrid media 2 of the present invention is inserted into the main machine 408. If the CD ROM drive defines the optical ROM portion as an F drive and the magnetic recording layer as a G drive, 100% of the data of the F drive is a 540-600 MB ROM which is a real ROM file 468 actually existing in the medium. However, the magnetic recording unit of the G drive is 32 KB, and the actual RAM file 469 has only 32 KB. However, as described above, the virtual RAM file 470 is logicalized by the OS or the device driver, and the real RAM file physically defined in the HDD C of the HDD or the HDD of another computer 408a via the network 472. The actual data of the virtual RAM file 470 is recorded in 471. Only when the actual data, data A, data B, C, D, E, and F in the virtual RAM file 470 are opened, the OS exists on the magnetic recording layer, that is, based on the connection table 473 in the main real RAM file 469. It operates as if the data in the RAM file is read out and the actual data is recorded in the virtual RAM file 470. In the connection table 473, a network address such as a TCP / IP address or an Ethernet address on the network of the computer 408a in which the HDD of the real RAM file 471 in which the actual data in the virtual RAM file 470 is recorded exists, and a connection protocol. Since the drive name and directory name recitation number of the real RAM file 471 are recorded, based on this connection table 473, as long as the network 472 is functioning, the OS stores the actual data of the virtual RAM file 470 as described above. Can be taken out of the sub-real RAM file 471 containing.

From the user's point of view, as long as the network is connected and functioning, the data in File A, B, C, D, E, and F are stored in the magnetic file 422 regardless of the computer in which the hybrid medium 2 of the present invention is inserted. A, B, C, D, E, and F appear to be recorded. However, what is actually recorded on the magnetic recording unit is the directory names such as usr1 and usr2 and the attribute data of the files such as the file names of File A, B, C, D, E, and F, the capacity, and the creation date and time. Only directory entry information is recorded. Since the directory entry data is 32 bytes in the case of MS-DOS, about 1000 files or directories can be actually recorded in the hybrid recording medium of the present invention having a capacity of 32 KB. Most of the conventional CD-ROMs come with one floppy disk. In the case of the present invention, the data capacity of each virtual file is set to the default value of 1.44 MB, which is the same as that of the floppy, so that there is an effect that it is easy to handle in terms of compatibility. Of course, it is also possible to set 10 MB and 100 MB as described above. In this case, there is a great effect that data of about 1000 files, that is, data of about 1 GB can be virtually recorded in a ROM / RAM medium having a physical RAM capacity of 32 KB. Although a medium combining a large-capacity, low-cost ROM and a small-capacity, low-cost RAM is economical, the present invention allows a user to obtain an exchange medium having a virtual large-capacity RAM without increasing the cost. You can enter. Although this method has been described using an example of a CD-ROM with a magnetic recording layer, the present invention can also be used for an optical disk or an IC card having a ROM and a RAM. FIGS. 220, 224, and 225 show examples in which a virtual RAM file is realized on an IC card having a ROM and a RAM. In the case of an IC card, the ROM is very cheap, but the cost of the nonvolatile RAM is several orders of magnitude higher as in the case of a flash memory. The same applies to optical disks. Generally, the price of ROM is much lower than the price of RAM, as seen in optical disks and ICs. According to the present invention, even if a medium in which a low-cost ROM section has a large capacity such as a CD-ROM with a magnetic recording layer and a high RAM section has a small capacity is used, the RAM capacity is virtually reduced in a device connected to a network. Since the capacity can be increased, the capacity of any exchangeable RAM medium can be virtually increased. PCs are connected to the network by 53% in the United States and 13% in Japan and are increasing. Therefore, the present invention has an extremely large effect of virtually dramatically increasing the capacity of the exchangeable RAM / ROM medium in the coming network age.

Of course, as shown in the medium 2y of FIG. 225, it goes without saying that the capacity of the exchangeable RAM only medium can be virtually increased. In this case, for example, an IC card having a capacity of 32 KB can effectively record and reproduce 1000 files without limitation in capacity.

The above describes the procedure for reproducing and rewriting an existing virtual file. A method for newly creating a virtual file will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. First, in step 491a, it is assumed that the user inputs a save command or a user ID for a new file name "x" data file as shown in the screen display diagram of FIG. 169 (a). The OS checks whether there is any free space in the magnetic file 422. If No, the process is stopped in step 491c. If Yes, in step 491d, the default primary machine ID 474 and secondary disk ID of the user ID are read. In step 491e, the default is acceptable. A screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 169 (a), and if No, the user is caused to input the default value changed in step 491f, and the user checks again. If Yes, the flow advances to step 491g to check whether the default main machine ID linked to the virtual file is the same as the machine ID into which the CDROM is currently bundled. If No, the process proceeds to step 492 a of the network connection subroutine, and if Yes, the process proceeds to step 491 h of the new file registration subroutine 493. In step 491h, it is checked whether or not there is a disk with the default disk ID. If No, in step 491i, it is checked whether the disk is a replaceable disk. If Yes, "insert @ disk @ xx" is displayed as shown in FIG. When the process returns to 491k, it is checked whether the physical capacity for securing the physical file is on the disk. If No, an "error" is displayed in step 491u, and if Yes, the flow advances to the next step 491m to record data from the cluster start number xx in the free area of the data area 473 of the physical file and check whether the data is completed in step 491n. If No, an error display of step 491u is issued. If Yes, the FAT area 466 and the directory area 465 of the physical file are rewritten based on the recording file. In step 491q, the OS records an invisible attribute such as “02H” in the attribute 458 of the directory entry 467 in FIG. 160 of the physical file. “01H” write protection may be recorded. In this way, the input control OS specially treats only such a virtual file, so that the file is linked to the virtual file and recorded / reproduced, but cannot be recorded or reproduced by another procedure. In the next step 491r, the main machine ID and the recitation number are recorded in the directory entry 467. In the next step 491s, unique information such as registration date and time and file name having the same contents as the directory entry 467 of the physical file 451 is recorded in the virtual directory entry 452 of the recording medium 2, so that when this virtual file is rewritten in the future, The collation with the physical file 451 can be reliably performed, and it is prevented that another physical file 451 in another personal computer on the network is erroneously rewritten. At step 491t, the new file creation routine is completed.

Now, returning to step 491g of the connection subroutine 488, if No, proceed to step 492a, read the LAN address of the main machine of the virtual directory entry 452, connect to the main personal computer via the network, and During this process, the physical file 451 of the virtual file 450 is registered using the file new registration subroutine 493, and the result is reported to the main personal computer. The flow from step 492a to step 492j is the same as in the case of FIG. At step 492i, the new registration is confirmed, and the process proceeds to step 491s, where the data of the directory entry 467 of the physical file 451 is recorded in the virtual directory entry 452 of the recording medium 2, and the registration of the new file is completed at step 491t.

In the embodiments described above, the screen display state when the OS is DOS is shown. FIG. 271 illustrates a display operation in the case of a window display such as MacOS or Windows OS. The basic operation is the same as in the case of the DOSOS shown in FIGS. 164 (a), (b), (c), (d), and FIGS. 165, 166, and 167. In FIG. 271, when the CD-ROM 2 with the RAM of the present invention is inserted, a set of the CD-ROM icon 570 and the CD-ROM / RAM icon 571 is displayed. This can be distinguished from the icon of the CD-ROM only because the icon has a different shape. Here, a window 567a for displaying directories 568a, 568b, and 568c in the CD-ROM opens, and directories 568a, 568b, and 568c are displayed. Until now, there is no difference from the conventional operation. However, in the present invention, since the CD-ROM-RAM icon 571 is displayed, when this icon is double-clicked, the data actually recorded in the magnetic recording portion, which is the RAM portion of the CD-ROM 2, is read. Then, the data of the directories 568d, 568e, and 568f are read from the master file in the RAM portion of the medium such as the magnetic recording layer in the window 567b and displayed on the screen. According to the present invention, as described above, the small-capacity master file of the virtual file is recorded in the magnetic recording unit, and the large-capacity slave file is invisible and recorded in the HDD. At this time, the window 567b displays the capacity display 576 of the 32 KB entity of the RAM unit, and at the same time, displays the capacity of the actual file physically allocated as the slave file of the master file in the HDD 571. The displayed “7.6 GB” virtual capacity display 577 is displayed. In FIG. 271, the entity data of the RAM unit is read. That is, only the data of the physical file 422 described with reference to FIG. 160 and the data actually recorded on the magnetic recording unit of the CD-ROM 2 are read, and the data in the virtual file 450, that is, the physical file 451 in the HDD is It is not read at the stage. Thus, for example, even in the CD-ROM 2 of the present invention having only a 32 KB RAM section, the user can see as if the RAM capacity had been expanded to 7.6 GB. In this case, as shown in FIG. 271, since the icon 570 in the ROM section of the CD-ROM 2 and the icon 571 in the RAM section can be clicked separately, there is an effect that they can be opened independently.

Next, in FIG. 272, when the icon 570 of the CD-ROM 2 is double-clicked with the mouse, the windows of the ROM section and the RAM section are integrated, and the combined windows 576a and 576b are simultaneously opened. In the window 567a of the ROM section, the actual capacity display of the actual file existing in the medium 2 of 640 KB in the ROM section of the CD-ROM 2 is displayed. On the other hand, in the window 567b of the RAM unit, both the virtual capacity display 577a of the slave file of the 7.6 GB virtual file that does not actually exist in the medium 2 and the real file display 576a of the master file existing in the 32KB medium 2 are displayed. Is displayed. In the case of FIG. 272, since the two windows are integrated, the directory and file of the ROM and RAM of the medium 2 are displayed in a single set of windows by double-clicking the icon 570 once. This has the effect of reducing Here, when the folder 568a is further opened, a window 567c of the folder 568a is opened as shown by an arrow 51a, and a file 569a recorded on the medium of the CD-ROM is displayed.

On the other hand, the folder 568c displayed in the window 567b of the RAM unit can be displayed by reading the actual master file in the medium 2. When this icon is double-clicked, a window 576d of the folder A opens as shown by an arrow 51b, and icons of the files 569b, 569c, and 569d are displayed. File information and directory information up to this operation are recorded in a small-capacity RAM unit such as a magnetic recording unit of the medium 2. Therefore, there is no need to read the actual physical file of the virtual file recorded in the hard disk 572a, that is, the folder 574 or the file 573 which is a slave file. The operator can operate as if the capacity of the RAM section of the CD-ROM 2 is 7.6 GB or 520 MB. In this case, the folder 574 and the file 573 of the substance file of the virtual file are not displayed on the screen as Invisible File. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation of rewriting or erasing the actual file when the CD-ROM 2 linked to the virtual file is not mounted by the operator. Up to this point, only the actual master file in the medium 2 has been opened.

Next, a case where a program in the file 569 of the virtual file shown in FIG. 272 is opened will be described with reference to FIG. When the user opens the file 569, a large-capacity 520 MB file “File @ X” in the file 569 actually exists as shown by a dotted arrow 51c and appears to be opened. However, the invisible file 573b in the invisible folder 574c in the invisible folder 574a that exists in the actual slave file HDD 571 and is not visible on the screen is opened by the OS described above as indicated by an arrow 51d. A large-capacity file such as DTP is opened together with the program recorded in the ROM section. For example, as indicated by a display 575, the operation is performed as if the capacity of the RAM unit is 520 MB.

In this case, if the CD-ROM / RAM medium 2 on which the master file linked to the virtual file is recorded is lost, the Invisible file 573b as the slave file cannot be deleted. Therefore, it is conceivable that a problem that the free space of the HDD 574 will gradually decrease without knowing in the future. To avoid this, selecting "Visualize Slave File" from the pull-down menu displays a window 567f for visualizing the slave file. When the correct password is input to the password input section 578a of the window 567f, the Invisible file 573b corresponding to the password is visualized as indicated by an arrow 51g. Next, when "Erase \ Virtual \ File" is selected from the pull-down menu, a file deletion window 567f is displayed. When the file name of this window 567f is input to the file name input section 579 and the password corresponding to the file is input to the password input section 578b, the physical file of Invisible \ File 573 to be deleted can be deleted from the HDD 571. it can. In this way, unnecessary files among the slave files of the virtual master file in the HDD 571 can be deleted. Therefore, the slave files in the HDDs to be linked can be arranged and used efficiently. Further, since the slave file is protected by the password, there is no fear that an operator other than the operator who has input the password of the master file erases the slave file. Thus, the slave file corresponding to the master file in the RAM section of the CD-ROM is protected. In the case where the actual slave file portion of the virtual master file is set in the HDD 571a in the other computer B via the network shown in FIG. 273, display and deletion are similarly protected by the password. .

Here, a method of displaying a virtual file in a window of MacOS or Windows OS will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. At step 566a, the CD-ROM is inserted, and at step 566b, the icon of the CD-ROM / RAM2 is displayed. If the first information directory or folder is to be opened in step 566c, a window 567a showing the first information directory in the ROM section of the CD-ROM / RAM is opened in step 566d as shown in FIG. 271. If the directory for the second information is to be opened in step 566e, the directory 568d in the RAM section of the CD-ROM / RAM is opened in step 566f. Then, at step 566g, the virtual capacity display 576, the real capacity display 577 of the virtual file "File @ X" recorded in the master file of the ROM section, the home machine name, home address, and drive of the personal computer containing the real slave file The name and directory name are displayed in the file attribute display window 567. At this point, only the master file of the virtual file needs to be opened, and there is no need to open the slave file in the HDD 571 or 571a of FIG. 273. If the slave file in the virtual file of the second information is to be opened in step 566k, the process proceeds to step 566i. If the home machine ID number and the ID number of the computer A currently operated are “matched”, the process proceeds to step 566j. . In this case, since the home HDD is directly connected to the computer A, there is no need to connect to the network. If "match" is not found in step 566i, the process proceeds to step 566p. At step 566p, as shown in FIG. 273, since the computer B different from the computer A to which the CD-ROM is connected is a home machine in which the slave file is recorded, it is necessary to connect to the network first. Therefore, first, it is checked whether or not the network is connected. If NO, the process proceeds to step 566m.

At step 566m, “Network \ is \ not \ connected” is displayed as shown in the network status display window 507h displayed on the display unit 16 shown in FIG. 273, and the process returns to step 566p again. If Yes, the process proceeds to step 566m, connects to the home machine via the network, and proceeds to step 566j. In step 566j, the CD-R0M medium 2 and the actual slave file of the virtual file are linked. Accordingly, the Invisible file 573 of the slave file physically existing in the home directory 574 of the HDD 571 of the home drive of the home machine corresponding to the virtual file of the CD-R0M is opened. In step 566k, as shown in FIG. 273, for example, "FileX" having a capacity of 520 MB is opened, and a program such as DTP recorded in the CD-ROM is started.

Since the OS of the present invention operates in this manner, when a medium having a large-capacity R0M software and a very small-capacity RAM of about 32 KB is used in one CD-R0M2, the capacity of the RAM is several GB. Etc. can be virtually expanded to a large capacity. In this case, physically, the physical file of the slave file is recorded in a real memory in the home HDD 571 of the machine on which the CD-R0M RAM is mounted or the home machine connected via the network. In the RAM part of the medium, information for connection via the network, such as the address of the home machine of the home HDD, and the directory, capacity, date, etc. of the actual entity file, as described in the previous embodiment, one file Only a few tens of bytes of information need to be recorded. Therefore, the physical capacity of the RAM portion of the CD-R0M RAM may be small. By displaying the window as shown in FIGS. 271, 272, and 273, the real file 573 of the virtual file is an Invisible file and is not displayed at all in the window. Therefore, the operator can see only the icon 571 in the RAM section of the CD-R0M2. Therefore, the operator sees as if several hundred MB or several GB files are recorded in the icon 571 of the RAM unit. That is, there is an effect that a 32 KB RAM can be handled like a large capacity RAM of several GB. Further, since the physical file of the slave is protected by the password and cannot be erased, and is invisible, it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation in which another operator mistakenly deletes the physical file. However, when the physical file corresponding to the virtual file is inevitably displayed or deleted without the original CD-R0M / RAM, a display such as a visualization window 567f appears. Here, by inputting a password, the Invisible file can be made a Visible file.

Next, in the method of the present invention, a window 567 is displayed when a virtual file is newly established, and a virtual file can be set by inputting a home machine name, a file name, and a password in this window. When a physical file is deleted, a window 567g is displayed. By inputting a file name and a password in this window, the physical file can be deleted without the master CD-R0M / RAM2. Even if the master CD-ROM / RAM 2 is lost, the physical file of the virtual file, that is, the slave file can be erased. In this way, in the present invention, the actual file 573, that is, the slave file, in the virtual file in the HDD 571 can be organized.

As described above, when the CD-R0M / RAM is used in the OS having the CD-R0M driver software such as the window or Mas0S, the CD-R0M. By using the virtual file for the RAM, the capacity of the RAM section of the CD-R0M can be virtually virtually expanded without any limitation. Therefore, by using both the low-cost CD-R0M / RAM medium 2 of the present invention and the virtual file of the present invention, an effect equivalent to or higher than that of a conventional expensive partial R0M optical disk can be obtained.

Although the example of the CD-R0M / RAM medium 2 is used as the small-capacity RAM, the virtual file is set in the RAM section of the exchange medium having R0M such as the RAM section of an IC card with ROM or a partial R0M optical disk. The same effect is obtained, but the description refers to the previous embodiment.

Next, the recording medium 2 will be described. When directory information is recorded on the magnetic recording layer in this way, if this data is destroyed, the virtual file will be destroyed. Therefore, when applied to a CDROM or the like, the same virtual directory entry is recorded at two or three places, as shown in FIG. In order to protect from a circumferential damage peculiar to a disc such as a CD, it is recorded on another track 67x, 67y, 67z. Also, in order to protect against scratches in the radial direction, the arrangement of the virtual directory entries 452x, 452y, 452z on the angles θx, θy, θz having different angles has the effect of preventing the destruction of directory information.

パ ソ コ ン In recent years, the price / capacity of HDDs has decreased by nearly 1000 times in 10 years, and the number of personal computers having a capacity of several to several tens GB has been increasing. Focusing on this point, the physical file is defined by the system using the capacity of the HDD which has a sufficient capacity, and the large capacity is stored in the RAM area of the optical disc 2 having the small capacity RAM of 8 to 32 KB of the present invention. By logically defining the virtual file, the user can treat the ROM disk with the optical RAM as having a large capacity recording memory of several MB to several GB. There is such a remarkable effect. Almost 100% of recent business personal computers are connected to some kind of LAN network. In addition, the OS of recent personal computers also has a network function. Therefore, even if there is no server-side physical file 451 corresponding to the virtual file 450 in the main personal computer 408 into which the optical disk 2 is inserted, the physical computer of the secondary personal computer 408a is automatically transmitted via this network as shown in FIG. In this embodiment, a method for accessing the file 451a and recording or reproducing data is disclosed. This method has a remarkable effect that the physical file of the virtual file can be accessed even if the optical recording medium 2 of the present invention is inserted into any personal computer. Although the embodiment in which these methods are incorporated in the network OS and the output control OS is shown, it is also possible to realize the method by an application program.

As described above, by providing the magnetic recording layer 3 on the back side of the recording medium 2 having an optical recording surface, a RAM type recording / reproducing apparatus such as magneto-optical recording performs recording / reproducing of magnetic field modulation type magneto-optical recording. By using the magnetic field head during the magnetic field modulation of the apparatus, magnetic recording of information of independent channels provided on the recording medium can be performed without increasing the number of parts and cost. In this case, since the slider tracking mechanism for the magnetic head is originally provided, there is almost no increase in cost on the recording / reproducing apparatus side. Therefore, there is an effect that a magnetic recording / reproducing function independent of optical recording can be added at almost the same price.

The recorded recording medium is applied to a music CD, HD, game CDROM or MDROM, and a magnetic recording track provided on the back side is reproduced by a ROM type recording / reproducing apparatus 1 shown in the block diagram of FIG. By doing so, a remarkable effect is obtained, such as being able to return to the state of the previous use during reproduction. Further, even when the recording is limited to only one track in the TOC area as described in the first embodiment, several hundred bits can be recorded when the gap width is 200 μm. This capacity satisfies the requirements required for the use of the current game IC-ROM with a flash memory. In the case where the number of tracks is limited to one in the TOC area, the system becomes simple because access means for the magnetic track is not required.

Also, in a read / write device of the read-only type for optical recording, it is necessary to provide a magnetic head portion or the like on the side opposite to the optical head with respect to the recording medium. The price can be reduced by mass production because it can be shared with the head. Originally, the cost is much lower than that of optical recording components for low-density magnetic recording components, so that the price increase is small. There is no additional tracking mechanism to mechanically link the optical head and the magnetic head on the opposite side. Therefore, the cost increase is small.

Although the tracking accuracy of the optical head is not high due to the address information or time information engraved on the optical recording layer on the surface of the RAM type or ROM type recording medium, any position on the disk can be obtained. Tracking control of the magnetic head. This has the effect of eliminating the need to add any expensive components for consumer use such as linear sensors and linear actuators found on floppy disks.

保護 The protective layer on the back surface of the conventional magnetic field modulation type magneto-optical recording medium is manufactured by spin coating from a binder and a lubricant. In the case of the present invention, a magnetic material is simply added to this material in the same step and spin coating is performed, and the number of manufacturing steps is not often increased. This increase in cost is negligible in terms of overall cost. Therefore, a new value of a magnetic recording function is added with almost no increase in cost.

As described above, in the present invention, a magnetic channel can be added with almost no increase in cost, so that a RAM function can be added to a conventional ROM-type optical disk or a ROM-only player.

A high Hc magnetic sheet of the present invention is attached to a label portion of an audio cassette or a video cassette such as DCC or VHS, and data recorded on the magnetic sheet is read by a magnetic head 8 at the time of cassette loading, and the data is stored in an IC memory of a microcomputer. If the data on the magnetic sheet needs to be updated, only the contents of the IC memory are updated while the cassette is inserted, and only the updated data out of the data stored in the IC memory is taken out of the cassette when the cassette is removed. By rewriting the data in the magnetic recording layer of the magnetic sheet with the fixed magnetic head provided, index information such as the address of the cassette tape and TOC can be recorded on the cassette independently of the tape. There is an effect that can be instantaneously.

In addition, in the video game machine in which the display 44a and the keypad 450 are connected in the configuration of FIG. 180 and the present invention is used, if the illegal recording identification signal is not recorded on the magnetic recording layer 3 so as not to reproduce, the illegal copying is performed. There is an effect that a CD can be eliminated. Naturally, data such as game results, scores, user names, environment setting data, etc. can be recorded and reproduced on the magnetic recording layer 3, so that the user can turn off the power or use another machine to perform the next operation. There is an effect that the game can be restarted from the middle of the game. The magnetic recording layer 3 is provided on the printing surface side of the CD in FIG. 180, but may be provided on the transparent substrate side as described above. In this case, there is an effect that the size can be reduced.

(Example 23)
FIG. 181 shows a block diagram of the twenty-third embodiment.

Embodiment 23 A description will be given of a recording / reproducing apparatus having a simple configuration. In general, a CD player of a system in which a recording medium such as a CD is taken in and out by opening an upper cover has a simple configuration and therefore has a small number of parts. In the case of this method, as shown in the top view of FIGS. 182 (a) and (b) and the cross-sectional views of FIGS. Only at that time, the magnetic head is moved onto the CD to facilitate the mounting of the CD. In FIG. 182 (a), the upper pig 389 is in an "open" state. At this time, there is no CD2. If the magnetic head 8 is present, the CD 2 cannot be mounted, and if it is forcibly mounted, the magnetic head 8 will be broken. Therefore, when the upper pig is opened, the magnetic head 8 is retracted under the magnetic head protection portion 501 provided outside the CD 2.

Next, when the CD 2 is mounted and the upper pig is closed, the magnetic head 8 and its suspension part move in the direction of the arrow 51 in conjunction with the upper pig 389 and move on the CD 2.

手 順 This procedure will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 183 (a), when the upper pig 389 is closed in the direction of arrow 51a, the lid rotating shafts 393 and 393a rotate, the head retractor 502 moves in the direction of arrow 51b, and the connected magnetic head 8 moves in the direction of arrow 51c. Moving. Thus, as shown in FIG. 183 (b), the magnetic head 8, the slider 41 and the suspension 41a move onto the recording medium 2 such as a CD.

Next, the elevation of the magnetic head 8 will be described with reference to FIGS. 183 (c), (d) and (e). As shown in FIG. 183 (c), the optical head 6 reproduces the innermost track 65a such as TOC, reads the media identifier 504 as shown in FIG. 184, determines whether or not the medium has the magnetic track 67. When the optical head 6 is moved inward from the innermost track as shown in 183 (d), the head elevator 505 is pushed by the head lifting link 503, and the magnetic head 8 contacts the outermost magnetic track 67a, and Record or reproduce a recording signal.

In this case, a servo signal area 505 is provided in the rotation servo control method as shown in FIG. 185 (a). At the time of manufacturing, a high Hc portion is applied as shown in FIG. 185 (b), and formatted at a factory or the like as shown in FIG. 506 is recorded in a synchronous signal area 507 by a factory or a dedicated machine using a magnetic head capable of recording even a magnetic material having a strong Hc such as 2750 to 4000 Oe. Next, as shown in FIG. 185 (d), a general magnetic part 402 having a slightly lower Hc of 1600 to 2750 Oe is applied. A protective layer 50 shown in FIG. 185 (e) is applied thereon.

で は In this method, the high Hc portion of the final medium cannot be rewritten due to space loss because the magnetic portion 402 and the protective layer 50 are on the high Hc portion even though magnetic recording is difficult at all. Therefore, the media unique number 506 recorded in the synchronization signal area 507 cannot be rewritten, and there is an effect that the above-mentioned illegal copy preventing function is not broken.

The servo signal 505 and the address signal can not only be recorded and reproduced by a commercially available recording and reproducing apparatus, but also do not demagnetize even if they are erroneously recorded. For this reason, the data in the synchronization signal area is almost completely protected after the shipment from the factory under any use condition, so that there is an effect that stable recording is realized.

Now, let us return to the description of the rotary servo in FIG. 183 (d). If an optical recording portion is provided inside the innermost circumference of the CD2, the normal rotation control of the CLV motor is performed by the synchronization signal of the optical track, so that the rotation speed of the motor becomes constant and the magnetic recording / reproducing is performed. Can be.

However, when there is no optical recording portion inside the innermost circumference according to the CD standard, the magnetic head 8 reproduces the servo signal 505 in the synchronization signal area 507 described in FIG. The rotation servo signal is reproduced by the servo signal reproduction unit 30c, sent to the motor drive circuit 26, and the motor is controlled at a constant rotation speed. In this way, data is stably recorded and reproduced in the sectors that require recording and reproduction among the data recording areas 508 and 508a of the magnetic track 67a in FIG. 185.

Next, when the recording / reproduction is completed, the optical head 6 moves to the outer peripheral portion as shown in FIG. 183 (e), whereby the head lifting link 503 returns to the original position, and the magnetic head 8 moves upward in the direction of the arrow 51e. Away from the magnetic track 67a to prevent wear. As described above, since the magnetic head 8 can be moved up and down by the traverse motor 23, it is not necessary to separately provide a head elevating actuator, and the number of parts can be reduced.

As shown in FIGS. 186 (c), (d) and (e), the optical head 6 is forcibly moved to the outermost periphery by the traverse motor 23 as shown in FIG. In order to move 503 in the direction of the arrow 51a, the magnetic head 8 is lowered in the direction of the arrow 51b, comes into contact with the magnetic track 67a, and recording and reproduction of a magnetic signal can be performed. At this time, if the magnetic noise of the optical head 6 interferes, the operation of the optical head actuator 18 is stopped. When the operation is stopped or when the signal of the optical track cannot be reproduced by the medium, the drive current of the optical head is stopped, and the rotation servo signal of FIG. 181 is obtained from the servo signal 505 of the magnetic track shown in FIG. Reproduction is performed by the reproduction unit 30c, and rotation servo is applied. Thus, optical reproduction and magnetic reproduction can be temporally separated. Therefore, the effect of noise from the optical head on magnetic reproduction is eliminated, and an effect that magnetic reproduction with a low error rate can be performed is added.

The method of the twenty-third embodiment can be used for a plurality of magnetic track systems or one track. However, in the case of the one-track system as described in another embodiment, no head access is required. This has the effect of simplifying the configuration of. In the case of one track on the outermost circumference, there is an effect that the capacity is increased.

In the multi-track embodiment described with reference to FIG. 1 and the like, magnetic noise is generated from the optical head 6 to the magnetic head 8 during magnetic reproduction as shown in FIG. 116, and the error rate is increased. In this case, as described above, a synchronization signal area 507 is provided in the sector as shown in FIG. 187, and a magnetic servo signal 505 is recorded on a factory or a formatter by using a medium. And the driving current of the optical head 6 can be stopped. Therefore, there is an effect that noise from the optical head can be cut off.

Next, a method of performing rotation servo with an optical servo signal without using a magnetic servo signal will be described with reference to the cross-sectional views of FIGS.

FIG. 188 (a) shows a state at t = 0. The optical head 6 is located on the outer track of the TOC track 65a. At t = t ₁ in FIG. 188 (b), the optical head 6 reads the TOC track 65a, and the media identifier 504 is the TOC subcode or the audio track in FIG. 184 (b) as shown in FIG. 184 (c). The subcode portion or the first track of the CDROM shown in FIG. 184 (a) is searched. At this time, the head lifting link 503 is moved from the dotted line A to the position indicated by the dotted line B by the optical head 6, so that the switch 511 of the mechanical delay unit 509 is turned on. However, the head lifting link 503a does not operate until the delay time t _D is reached. Then, to complete the reproduction of the TOC data in FIG. 184 of t = t ₂ (c). Since this time is a fraction of a second, if the delay time t _D > t ₂ is set, the magnetic head 8 does not move downward. When there is no media identifier, that is, when it is OFF, t _D > t ₃ . In FIG. 188 (d) at t = t ₃ , the optical head 6 moves in the direction of the arrow 51d, and the head lifting link 503 stops pressing the switch 511, so that the head does not descend.

When there is a media identifier, there is always a magnetic track 67a. That is, at the time of ON, at t = t _{4 where} t ₄ > t _D , as shown in FIG. 188 (e), since the switch 511 is pressed for the set delay time t _D or more, the output of the mechanical delay unit 509 operates, The head lifting link 503a pushes down the support portion including the suspension of the magnetic head 8 in the direction of arrow 51e, and the magnetic head contacts the magnetic track 67a. At this time, since the optical head 6 is reproducing the optical track 65a such as TOC, an optical servo signal is reproduced, and the motor 17 is rotated at a constant rotational speed at CLV by the optical servo signal. Therefore, the magnetic signal is reproduced in synchronization with the synchronization signal of the optical reproduction signal. In this case, since the rotation servo can be applied simultaneously with the magnetic reproduction and the optical reproduction signal, it is not necessary to add a configuration of the rotation servo separately, and there is an effect that the configuration of the medium and the apparatus is simplified. In this case, the rotary servo signal reproducing unit 30c can be omitted from FIG.

When the reproduction or recording of the magnetic signal is completed, the system control unit 10 in FIG. 181 sends a signal to the traverse moving circuit 24a to move the optical head 6 in the direction of the arrow 51f, and the switch 511 of the mechanical delay unit 509 is released. are, in t = t ₅ after a short delay time t _DS elapsed since t _D as shown in FIG. 188 (f), the head elevating link 503a rises upward in the arrow 51 g, the magnetic head 8 is raised, the magnetic track 67a Be released from contact with In this way, the magnetic head can be moved up and down with a simpler configuration, and optical reproduction and magnetic reproduction can be performed simultaneously.

When a plurality of magnetic tracks 67 are used as shown in FIG. 185, the track width T _WH of the magnetic head 8 is first set to the width of the magnetic track 67a as shown in the cross-sectional view of the medium in FIG. 189 (a). It is larger than the width T _W by the amount of eccentricity. This has the effect that the recording head and the reproducing head can be shared. This is because by setting T _WH >> T _W , recording can be performed on all the magnetic tracks 67a, so that the previous recording portion does not remain at all. By providing a plurality of tracks with the magnetic layers separated as shown in FIG. 189 (a), the recording / reproducing head can be shared.

Now, if a plurality of tracks method, setting of the track pitch T _P is important. In the case of the CD standard, an error Δr in the radial direction of ± 0.2 mm between the position of the optical track 65 and the center of the circle of the CD is allowed. Under ideal conditions, as shown in FIG. 189 (a), the magnetic track 67a is arranged behind the specific optical track 65a, and the access to the magnetic track by the optical address can be performed accurately. However, in reality, the optical track 65a and the magnetic track 67a are shifted by + Δr under the worst condition as shown in FIG. 189 (b), or − △ under the worst condition in the opposite direction as shown in FIG. 189 (c). Two states are considered when the optical track 65a and the magnetic track 67a are shifted by r. To prevent the magnetic head 8 from accidentally accessing the adjacent magnetic track 67b,
_{r- △ r-T WH / 2} > r + △ must meet the _{r + T WH / 2-T} P,
T _P > 2 △ r + T _WH .

In the case of CD, since Δr = 0.2 mm, T _P > 0.4 mm
That is, it is necessary to set the track pitch wider by 0.4 mm or more.

By separating the magnetic layer and recording magnetic servo signals using a single magnetic head as shown in FIGS. 187 (a) and 189 (a), the system has a simple configuration as shown in FIG. Has the effect of becoming

The method of moving the magnetic head 8 up and down by using the traverse motor 23 described in FIGS. 183 (c), (d), and (e) of the present embodiment uses the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 6 as shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. This is applicable even when the head 8 is on the same side of the medium. When the identifier is determined from the state of the TOC track 67a in FIG. 191 (c), the optical head 6 moves in the direction of the arrow 51a to the state of FIG. 191 (d), the head lifting link 503 moves in the same direction, and the direction of the arrow 51b. The magnetic head 8 is lifted up and brought into contact with a magnetic track 67a provided on the outer peripheral portion on the optical recording surface side to perform magnetic recording / reproduction. At this time, the optical head reproduces an optical servo signal by using an optical track provided on the inner peripheral portion and applies rotation servo, or performs low speed rotation by applying rotation servo using a magnetic servo signal provided in advance on the magnetic track 67a. .

After the magnetic recording is completed, the optical head 6 moves to the outer peripheral portion as shown in FIG.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 192 (c) to (d), the optical head 6 moves to the arrow 51a outside the outermost peripheral portion, thereby lifting the magnetic head 8 to the arrow 51b to contact the magnetic track 67a. You can also. Since the operation is almost the same as that of FIG. 186, the description is omitted.

As described above, by providing the magnetic recording track 67a on the outer peripheral portion on the optical recording surface side, even if the magnetic head 8 is provided on the same side as the optical head 6, the magnetic head 8 can be moved up and down by the traverse motor 23, and the number of parts can be reduced. Can be reduced. When this same surface method is used for an upper pig type CD player or the like, as shown in FIG. 193 (a), when the upper pig 389 is opened and the CD 2 is not mounted, the magnetic head 8 and the suspension 41a are externally mounted. It will be exposed. These are broken when touched by hand unlike the light pick 6. To avoid this, the magnetic head shutter 512 covers the upper part of the magnetic head 8 when the upper pig 389 is open. When the upper pig 389 is closed by mounting the CD 2, the magnetic head shutter 512 moves in the direction of the arrow 51 a to expose the magnetic head 8. This operation will be described with reference to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 191 (a). As the upper cover 389 closes in the direction of arrow 51, the lid rotation shaft 393 rotates in the direction of arrow 51d, and the magnetic head shutter 512 moves in the direction of arrow 51e. Then, as shown in FIG. 191 (b), the magnetic head window 513 is opened, and the magnetic head 8 can be moved up and down. The same applies to the case of FIGS. 192 (a) and (b). By providing the magnetic head shutter 512, there is an effect that the magnetic head 8 and the suspension 41a, which are weak against external force, can be reliably prevented from being inadvertently broken by an operator's finger or the like.

Next, as shown in the top views of FIGS. 193 (a) and 193 (b), there is no problem when the traverse positions of the magnetic head 8 and the optical head 6 are distant from each other. When it is necessary to provide a magnetic head 8 with a spring 514 as shown in FIG. 194 (e), the magnetic head 8 is driven in the direction of the arrow 51a only when the optical head 6 reproduces the outermost optical track 65a. By being pushed by the head 6 and retracted outward, there is an effect that the access range of the optical head 6 can be secured. This is particularly effective when reproducing a medium such as a CD in which the magnetic recording track 67a is not provided on the optical recording surface side, since it is necessary to access the outermost optical track.

An embodiment in which a magnetic track 67 is provided on an MD (Mini Disk) ROM disk in a cartridge 42 will be described with reference to FIGS. 222 (a) to (f). As shown in the top view of FIG. 222A, the cartridge 42 of the MD ROM disk has only a small radial shutter window 302 on one side, so that when both the magnetic head 8 and the optical head 6 are provided, the same straight line is used. 514c. Therefore, the tracking range of the optical head 6 and the position of the magnetic head overlap. The presence of the magnetic head 8 makes it difficult for the optical head 6 to access the outermost optical track 65a. In the present invention, as shown in FIG. 222 (e), the magnetic head 8 has a movable structure in the radial direction, and is pressed against a stopper 514d by a spring 514 to be fixed at a predetermined position. Therefore, when the optical head 6 accesses the outermost optical track 65a as shown in FIG. 222 (f), the magnetic head 8a moves from the moving area 514c of the optical head 6 in the radial or circumferential direction as shown in the magnetic head 8a. The head 8 retracts temporarily. Thus, even if the magnetic head 8 is arranged in one of the shutter windows 302, the effect that the optical head 6 can access the outermost optical track 65a can be obtained. When the optical head 6 returns to the inner peripheral portion, the magnetic head 8 also returns to a predetermined position by the spring 514 and the stopper 514c. The magnetic track 67 is provided on the outermost peripheral portion on the optical reading side of the medium, with only one track having a thickness h on the surface on the optical reading side. Because of the thickness, the optical recording portion is not in contact with the optical recording portion, so that the influence is minimized, and the maximum capacity per track is obtained because the outermost periphery is used. In this case, the expected interference between the arrangement of the magnetic head and the optical head can be avoided by the evacuation method of the present invention, so that the medium and system of the ROM disk with the magnetic recording layer can be realized while maintaining compatibility with the conventional MD disk. The effect is obtained.

Here, before describing the method of using the lifting / lowering motor of the magnetic head also as the traverse motor of the optical head, first, prohibition and cancellation of lifting / lowering of the magnetic head will be described. The ROM medium 2 having a magnetic layer has a magnetic recording layer identification hole 313a as shown in FIG. Since the cartridge of the medium without the magnetic layer does not have the identification hole 313a, the magnetic head lifting / lowering prohibiting means 514b is pushed as shown in FIG. For this reason, there is an effect that the magnetic head 8 is prevented from being raised and lowered by mistake and damaging the medium 2. Since the movable state is maintained in the direction of the optical head traveling area 514c, the optical head 6 can access the outermost optical track 65a.

When the medium 2 having the magnetic layer is mounted, the magnetic head 8 is prevented from being pushed downward because the magnetic head elevating prohibiting means 514b is not pushed downward as shown in FIG. Is not restricted. Since the lifting and lowering of the magnetic head can be prohibited and released by a simple mechanical component such as the magnetic head lifting and lowering prohibiting means 514b, there is an effect that the identification electric switch and the actuator for prohibiting the lifting and lowering can be omitted.

(5) Next, a method of elevating the magnetic head will be described. When the optical head 6 is at a position other than the innermost peripheral portion, the magnetic head 8 is in the OFF state as shown in FIG. However, as shown in FIG. 222 (e), when the optical head 6 moves to the innermost circumference, the head lifting / lowering connecting means 51a moves in the direction of the arrow 51b, and the magnetic head 8 rises in the direction of the arrow 51c to come into contact with the magnetic track 67a. I do. Thus, magnetic recording and reproduction can be performed. When the optical head 6 returns to the normal position from the innermost periphery, as shown in FIG. 222 (c), the magnetic head 8 is lowered and the contact with the magnetic track 67a is released. This method is suitable for a ROM medium in which a directory or TOC is recorded on the innermost circumference, such as a CD or MD. This is because, in the case of the present invention, magnetic recording and reproduction need only be performed twice at the beginning and end of loading of a disk, but in the case of a CD or MD, the TOC is always read once at the beginning of loading of a disk for several seconds. In this embodiment, the magnetic head 8 contacts the magnetic track 67a during this period to reproduce magnetic data. Since the optical reproduction of the TOC area is performed at the same time, the rotation servo is performed, and the write clock for magnetic recording can be obtained by dividing the frequency from the optical synchronous clock. In this manner, the magnetic head can be moved up and down by the traverse motor 23 of the optical head, so that the effect that the configuration is simplified can be obtained. When it is necessary to rewrite the data of the magnetic track 67a when the disk reproducing operation is completed, when the optical head 6 is moved to the innermost circumference again at the end of the operation, the magnetic head 6 and the magnetic track 67a come into contact with each other. After the data of the magnetic track stored in the cache memory 34 is transferred to the magnetic track 67a, the optical head returns to the original position, the magnetic head 8 is brought into a non-contact state, and all operations are completed.

Next, when the optical head and the magnetic head are arranged on different sides of the medium, the magnetic field from the magnet may be large depending on the design of the optical head 6. FIG. 195 shows the measured data of the magnetic field of the optical recording layer of the CD of the "SANYO" CDROM optical pickup. 400 gauss when there is no magnetic head, and 800 gauss when the magnetic head 8 is opposed. Therefore, if the Hc of the medium is low, the magnetic recording data may be lost. As a countermeasure, first, as in the present invention, Hc is increased to 1500 Oersted, and when such an optical head is used, the magnetic head 8 should be prevented from facing as much as possible. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 196 (c), the magnetic head retreat link 515 is moved in link with the traverse, and when the optical head 6 accesses the outer optical track 65a, the magnetic head 8 is pushed out of the recording medium 2. By doing so, concentration of magnetic flux by the magnetic head 8 is avoided, and there is an effect that destruction of magnetic recording data can be prevented.

Such well field of direct current from the optical head 6, the magnetic noise of the indicated such ac in FIG. 116, away from the optical head 6 containing an optical head actuator, as shown in FIG. 197 L _H by a distance of more than By providing the magnetic head 8, it is possible to prevent DC and AC noise from the optical head 6 from being disturbed. It is understood that the distance L L needs to be at least 10 mm since the noise is reduced by 15 dB when the distance L _H is at least 10 mm from FIG.

Next, in the case of the one-track system, the configuration is simplified. However, even if the outermost track is used, the CD has a diameter of 12 cm, and since there is no cartridge, only a few KB are considered in consideration of high Hc and space loss. Recording capacity cannot be secured. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 198 (a), when the multi-track head 8 in which the track 67a is divided into three is used, the capacity is increased three times. Considering the eccentricity of the CD, the track density can be tripled by using the magnetic head 8 having three azimuth angles of the azimuth heads 8a, 8b and 8c as shown in FIG. 198 (b). Although the track pitch T _P If it is a non-azimuth head is required 0.4 mm + track width, which clogs When it is azimuth head until 0.13 mm + track width. When the azimuth heads 8a and 8b having two azimuth angles are used as shown in FIGS. 198 (c) and (d), a double capacity can be obtained.

Next, a method for recording a media identifier in the TOC section will be described. In the TOC section of the top view of the medium in FIG. 199 (a), the optical track 65a, 65b, 65c, 65d as shown in FIG. 199 (b) meanders and wobbles to record a signal. New information can be recorded. The wobbling signal can be reproduced by providing the wobbling signal demodulator 38c in the optical reproduction section as shown in FIG. According to this method, since information such as a media identifier can be recorded in the TOC, it is possible to identify a medium only by reproducing the TOC, and a new effect that a song name and a title name can be recorded in the TOC is also produced.

Although the method of moving the magnetic head up and down using the traverse motor 23 has been described, the head can be moved up and down using the loading motor 516 in a tray-type CD player as shown in FIG. In FIG. 201A, the loading motor 516 rotates, the tray moving gear 518 moves in the direction of the arrow 51a, and the loading of the tray 520 starts. In FIG. 201B, the tray 520 is stored, the micro switch 521 is pressed, the motor stops, and the reproduction of the CD starts. When there is a media identifier, the motor 516 further rotates in the direction of the arrow 51g, and the tray moving gear 518 further advances in the direction of the arrow 51b, and rotates the head lifting link 503 to drive the head lifting device 519 as shown in FIG. The head 8 is pushed up in the direction of the arrow 51c to bring the head 8 into contact with the magnetic track 67a to perform magnetic recording and reproduction. When the magnetic recording / reproduction is completed, the motor 516 rotates in the reverse direction, the tray moving gear 518 moves in the direction of the arrow 51d, and accordingly, the head elevator 519 moves up in the direction of the arrow 51e, and the magnetic head 8 moves the magnetic track 67a. , And light regeneration is normally performed. As described above, the magnetic data is stored in the memory unit 34 of the IC memory, and the data is updated using the data in the memory unit 34. Then, immediately before the tray is discharged, only the update data is actually magnetically recorded and reproduced, and the magnetic recording data is updated.

As shown in the perspective view of FIG. 226, one embodiment of the system of the present invention in which a magnetic head 8 is mounted on the side opposite to the optical head 6 on a recording / reproducing apparatus such as an upper / lower opening / closing type CD player. Is shown.

In the method described with reference to FIG. 131 in the previous embodiment, the moving direction of tracking of the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 is perpendicular to the open / close axis 521 of the upper pig. There is a problem that the facing position of the head 6 is shifted. On the other hand, in the method of FIG. 226, the moving direction of the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 by the traverse motor 23a as indicated by the arrow 51 is parallel to the opening / closing axis 521 of the upper pig 389. For this reason, there is a term that even when the upper pig 389 is opened and closed, the facing position of the set of the suspension 41a, the magnetic head 8, and the optical head 6 does not shift at all. In this way, the magnetic track on the back side of the optical track can be accessed more accurately.

Since the upper pig 38a is provided with the optical sensor 386, when the upper pig is closed, the optical sensor 386 reads the optical mark provided on the label surface of the CD2 and moves the head up and down by the elevating motor 21 only when there is a magnetic layer. By driving the magnetic head 519 and lowering the magnetic head 8 on the magnetic layer, the conventional CD can be prevented from being broken.

Next, a case where the present invention is applied to a CD player having a video CD playback function will be described. Although FIGS. 180, 181 and 200 described above show examples in which the Hybrid media of the present invention is used for a photo CD player or a video CD player, the details will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 227. The block diagram of FIG. 227 has the same basic configuration and operation as the block diagram of FIG. 181, and therefore detailed description is omitted, and only different portions and portions related to the video CD will be described. A moving picture reproducing section 33b in the output section 33 includes an MPEG video decoder 33e conforming to the MPEG1 standard, which decompresses the reproduced image-compressed video signal and restores the original video moving picture image signal. The D / A converter 33f and the NTSC / PAL encoder 33g output the analog TV signal of NTSC or PAL to the monitor 449. The audio is output as analog audio by the MPEG audio decoder 33j and the D / A converter 33k using the MPEG2 level 2.

ブ ロ ッ ク A characteristic feature of the block diagram of FIG. 227 is that a menu screen-selection number table 522 in which the number selected for each menu screen in the playback function of the video CD is stored in the memory. Then, a part or all of the contents of the menu screen-selection number table 522 is obtained by reproducing the track 67a of the magnetic recording layer 3 of the recording medium 2 by the magnetic recording / reproducing circuit. At the end, the changed data is recorded on the magnetic recording layer only when there is a change in the contents of the menu screen-selection number table 522.

This is described from the viewpoint of the file structure using the data structure diagram of FIG. 228. The optical recording, that is, the Video @ CD format of the CD-ROM is created based on the ISO9660 standard of the CD-ROM-XA standard. The DVD stores an index of a video CD called a video CD data track 526, a menu, a control signal, and the like. The list ID offset table 525 includes a moving image address 525a and a still image address 525b. In the playback control unit 523, a playlist 523a indicating a moving image playback procedure and a selection list 523b indicating a menu screen playback procedure are recorded, and control information of the playback procedure is included.

ビ デ オ Since a normal CD-ROM video CD has only the optically recorded data shown in FIG. 228, only temporary work can be performed. However, in the case of the CD-HB of the present invention, since the menu screen number-selection number table 522 is recorded in the magnetic recording data and can be updated, the past menu selection number of the operator can be reproduced again. . For example, the screen can be advanced to the last branch point learned last time in the educational software. This has the effect that the operator does not need to input the number again in the menu.

Next, the operation of the video CD player of the present invention will be described in terms of procedures. FIG. 229 shows a flowchart of the present invention. At step 524a, reproduction of the video CD is started. At step 524b, the presence or absence of magnetic data is checked. If No, normal reproduction is performed at step 524t, and the screen is reproduced according to the procedure shown at step 524u. If Yes, the operator name of the magnetic data is reproduced in step 524c, a menu screen for magnetic data is displayed, and the operator's name is selected. If No during the use of the magnetic data in step 524d, normal reproduction is performed. If Yes, the magnetic data is reproduced in step 524e, and the data of the menu screen number-selection number table 522 corresponding to the operator is reproduced. Next, in step 524f, reproduction is performed based on a branching procedure of the playback control area of the optical recording layer. In this case, the address of the moving image is obtained from the playlist 523a, and the address of the menu screen is obtained from the selection list 523b. At steps 524g and 524h, the moving image is reproduced and the Nth menu still image is output. At this time, in step 524j, the N-th data 522n is read from the menu screen-selection number table 522 as shown in FIG. 230, and the number corresponding to the operator, for example, the selection number N-1, is read out. Next, the next screen is reproduced in step 524q with the menu number. If the selection number is not recorded in step 524k, the operator is caused to select in steps 524m and 524n. In steps 524r and 524s, completion and continuation are checked. If not continued, the flow proceeds to step 524u. In step 524w, a menu selection number is asked to be saved. If so, only the change in the selection number of each menu is recorded on the magnetic recording layer, and the process ends at step 524z. Thus, there is an effect that different rotation reproduction can be performed for each operator of the video CD.

The normal video CD playback procedure is shown in step 524u. However, the menu screens 1 and 2 stop the screen, and the conventional method has a problem that it is troublesome because the operator has to manually input the number every time. . According to the present invention, there is an effect that the operator does not need to input once after inputting. FIG. 231 (a) shows a data structure of an image and a sound. FIG. 231 (b) shows the index number of one track of MPEG data.

(4) Next, a method of accessing a magnetic track at a higher speed will be described. As shown in FIG. 232, when accessing a magnetic track by searching for a specific address, it takes time to search for an optical address. In order to search for an optical address at a high speed, in the CD, 1 is continuously recorded on the P bit of the subcode shown in FIG. Then, as shown by the optical tracks 65a and 65b in FIG. 232, when the optical head 6 moves on the track 65, P = 1 can always be reproduced and detected. In the present invention, the magnetic track search information 527 where the subcode, for example, Tbit is set to 1 near one round, is independent of the optical address search information 526 and the optical track 65x. By providing the magnetic track at 65y, an effect is obtained that the corresponding magnetic track can be searched at a much higher speed. The magnetic address may be recorded in, for example, Ubit of the subcode.

The playback device of the present invention is useful as a device for realizing copy protection and the like.

1 is a block diagram of a recording / reproducing apparatus according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 2 is an enlarged view of an optical recording head unit according to the first embodiment. Enlarged view of a head section in Embodiment 1 Enlarged view of a head section in a tracking direction according to the first embodiment. Enlarged view of a magnetic head unit according to the first embodiment. Timing chart of magnetic recording in the first embodiment Sectional view of the recording medium in Embodiment 1 Sectional view of the recording medium in Embodiment 1 Sectional view of the recording medium in Embodiment 1 Sectional view of the recording unit in Embodiment 1 Sectional view of the recording unit in Embodiment 1 Sectional view of the recording unit in Embodiment 1 Sectional view of the recording unit in Embodiment 1 Sectional view of the recording unit in Embodiment 1 FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the cassette according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the recording / reproducing apparatus according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of a recording / reproducing apparatus according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the game machine according to the first embodiment. Block diagram of a magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus according to a second embodiment of the present invention Enlarged view of a magnetic head unit according to the second embodiment. Enlarged view of a magnetic head unit according to the second embodiment. Enlarged view of a magnetic head unit according to the second embodiment. 3 is an enlarged view of a recording unit according to a third embodiment of the present invention. Block diagram of a recording / reproducing device according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention. Enlarged view of a magnetic recording unit according to the fourth embodiment. Enlarged view of a magneto-optical recording unit in Example 4 Sectional view of the recording unit in Embodiment 4 Flowchart in Embodiment 4 Flowchart in Embodiment 4 (A) is a sectional view of the fourth embodiment when a magneto-optical disk is mounted, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the fourth embodiment when a CD is mounted. Enlarged view of the magneto-optical recording unit according to the fourth embodiment. Block diagram of a recording / reproducing device according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. Enlarged view of a magnetic recording unit according to the fifth embodiment. Enlarged view of a magneto-optical recording unit according to the fifth embodiment. Enlarged view of a magneto-optical recording unit according to the fifth embodiment. Enlarged view of a magnetic recording unit according to the fifth embodiment. Enlarged view of a magneto-optical recording unit according to the fifth embodiment. Block diagram of a recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 6 of the present invention Block diagram of a magnetic recording unit according to the sixth embodiment. Enlarged view of a magnetic field modulation unit according to the sixth embodiment. Top view of the magnetic recording unit according to the sixth embodiment. Top view of the magnetic recording unit according to the sixth embodiment. Enlarged view of a magnetic recording unit according to the sixth embodiment. Enlarged view of a magnetic field modulation unit according to the sixth embodiment. (A) is a top view of the disk cassette according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention, and (b) is a top view of the disk cassette according to the seventh embodiment. (A) is a top view of the disk cassette in the seventh embodiment. (B) is a top view of the disk cassette in the seventh embodiment. (A) is a top view of the disk cassette in the seventh embodiment. (B) is a top view of the disk cassette in the seventh embodiment. (A) is a top view of the disk cassette in the seventh embodiment. (B) is a top view of the disk cassette in the seventh embodiment. (A) is a top view of a liner peripheral portion in the seventh embodiment. (B) is a top view of a liner peripheral portion in the seventh embodiment. (C) is a top view of a liner peripheral portion in the seventh embodiment. (A) is a top view of the periphery of the liner in the seventh embodiment. (B) is a top view of the periphery of the liner in the seventh embodiment. (C) is a cross-sectional view of the liner in the seventh embodiment. Cross-sectional view of a disk cassette according to a seventh embodiment. Cross-sectional view of the A-A 'plane when the liner pin is inserted off in Embodiment 7 Cross-sectional view of the A-A 'plane when the liner pin is inserted in the seventh embodiment. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the A-A 'plane when the liner pin is inserted off in the seventh embodiment. (B) is a cross-sectional view of the A-A' plane when the liner pin is inserted in the seventh embodiment. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the A-A 'plane when the magnetic head mount is off in the seventh embodiment. (B) is a cross-sectional view of the A-A' plane when the magnetic head mount is on in the seventh embodiment. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the A-A 'plane when the magnetic head mount is off in the seventh embodiment. (B) is a cross-sectional view of the A-A' plane when the magnetic head mount is on in the seventh embodiment. Top view of the recording medium in Embodiment 7 (A) is a cross-sectional view of the A-A 'plane when the liner pin is inserted off in the seventh embodiment. (B) is a cross-sectional view of the A-A' plane when the liner pin is inserted in the seventh embodiment. Sectional view of front part of liner pin in Embodiment 7 (when off) Sectional view of front part of liner pin in Embodiment 7 (when on) Cross-sectional view of liner pin in Embodiment 7 (at the time of off) Cross-sectional view of the liner pin in Example 7 (when on) Sectional view of front part at the time of liner pin off in Embodiment 7 Sectional view of the front part when the liner pin is on in Embodiment 7 Sectional view of front part at the time of liner pin off in Embodiment 7 Sectional view of the front part when the liner pin is on in Embodiment 7 Sectional view of front part at the time of liner pin off in Embodiment 7 Cross-sectional view of the front portion of the seventh embodiment when the liner pin is off when not operating. (A) is a top view of the disk cassette according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention, and (b) is a top view of the disk cassette according to the eighth embodiment. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the peripheral portion when the liner pin is inserted off in the eighth embodiment. (B) is a cross-sectional view of the peripheral portion when the liner pin is inserted in the eighth embodiment. (A) is a top view of the disk cassette in the eighth embodiment. (B) is a top view of the disk cassette in the eighth embodiment. (C) is a top view of the disk cassette in the eighth embodiment. Cross-sectional view of a disk cassette and a liner pin in Embodiment 8 (A) is a cross-sectional view of the peripheral portion of the liner pin in the eighth embodiment. (B) is a cross-sectional view of the peripheral portion of the liner pin when the conventional cassette is mounted in the eighth embodiment. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the peripheral portion when the liner pin is inserted off in the eighth embodiment. (B) is a cross-sectional view of the peripheral portion when the liner pin is inserted in the eighth embodiment. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the peripheral portion when the liner pin is inserted off in the eighth embodiment. (B) is a cross-sectional view of the peripheral portion when the liner pin is inserted in the eighth embodiment. Top view of a disk cassette according to Embodiment 9 of the present invention Cross-sectional view of the peripheral portion when the liner pin is inserted off in Embodiment 9 Cross-sectional view of the peripheral portion when the liner pin is inserted in Embodiment 9 (A) is a cross-sectional view of the peripheral portion of the ninth embodiment when the liner pin is inserted off, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the peripheral portion of the ninth embodiment when the liner pin is inserted. (A) is a tracking principle diagram of the tenth embodiment of the present invention when no correction is made, and (b) is a tracking principle diagram of the tenth embodiment when the correction is not made. (A) is a tracking state diagram of the optical head in the tenth embodiment. (B) is a tracking state diagram of the optical head in the tenth embodiment. (A) is a diagram of the eccentricity of the optical track of the disk in the tenth embodiment. (B) is a diagram of the eccentricity of the optical track in the tenth embodiment. (C) is a diagram of the tracking error signal in the tenth embodiment. (A) is a tracking state diagram of the optical head according to the tenth embodiment before correction, and (b) is a tracking state diagram of the optical head after correction according to the tenth embodiment. The figure of the reference track in the tenth embodiment. (A) is a side view of the slider at the time of ON in the tenth embodiment. (B) is a side view of the slider at the time of OFF in the tenth embodiment. (A) is a side view of the slider unit when magnetic recording is OFF in the tenth embodiment. (B) is a side view of the slider unit when magnetic recording is ON in the tenth embodiment. Correspondence diagram of disk position and address in the tenth embodiment Block diagram at the time of magnetic recording in Embodiment 11 of the present invention (A) is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic head according to the eleventh embodiment. (B) is a low-side view of the magnetic head according to the eleventh embodiment. (C) is a low-side view of another magnetic head according to the eleventh embodiment. Spiral recording format diagram in Embodiment 11 Guard band recording format diagram in Embodiment 11 Data structure diagram in Embodiment 11 (A) is a recording timing chart in the eleventh embodiment. (B) is a recording timing chart in the two-head simultaneous recording in the eleventh embodiment. Block diagram at the time of reproduction in the eleventh embodiment Data arrangement diagram in the eleventh embodiment Flow chart of traverse control in Embodiment 11 A cylindrical recording format diagram in the eleventh embodiment. Relationship diagram between traverse gear rotation speed and radius in Embodiment 11 Optical recording surface format diagram in Embodiment 11 Recording format diagram when backward compatibility is provided in Embodiment 11 Correspondence diagram of an optical recording surface and a magnetic recording surface in Example 11 Overall perspective view of a recording medium according to Embodiment 12. Overall perspective view of a recording medium in Example 12 Cross-sectional view of a film forming and printing process of a recording medium in Example 12 Cross-sectional view of a film forming and printing process of a recording medium in Example 12 Overall perspective view of a coating process in Example 12 Cross-sectional view of a recording medium in a coating and transferring step in Example 12 Manufacturing process chart of recording medium in Example 12 Cross sectional view of a recording medium in a coating and transferring step of the recording medium in Example 12 Overall perspective view of a recording medium application step in Example 12 Overall block diagram of a recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 13 Cross-sectional view of the periphery of the magnetic head in Example 13 FIG. 14 is a diagram showing the relationship between the head gap length and the attenuation (dB) in the thirteenth embodiment. Top view of a magnetic track in Example 13 Cross-sectional view of the periphery of the magnetic head in Example 13 Cross sectional view of the thirteenth embodiment when a recording medium is inserted. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between a distance between an optical pickup and a magnetic head and a relative noise amount according to Examples 12 and 13 of the present invention. 13 is a cross-sectional view of a head traverse unit according to a thirteenth embodiment of the present invention. Top view of the head traverse section in Embodiment 13 Cross sectional view of another head traverse part in the thirteenth embodiment. Cross sectional view of another head traverse part in the thirteenth embodiment. Diagram of the magnetic field strength of various household products in Example 12 A recording format diagram of a recording medium in Embodiment 13 A recording format diagram of a normal mode on a recording medium in Embodiment 13 Recording format diagram of variable track pitch mode on recording medium in Embodiment 13 Explanatory drawing for compressing magnetic recording information using a reference table of optical recording information in Embodiment 13 Cross-sectional view of a head traverse section in Embodiment 13 Flow chart of recording / reproducing in the thirteenth embodiment (No. 1) Flowchart of recording / reproducing in embodiment 13 (part 2) Configuration diagram of the noise detection head in Embodiment 13 Configuration diagram of a magnetic sensor in Example 13 (A) is a cross-sectional view showing the open / close state of the upper pig of the recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 14 of the present invention. (B) is a top view of the printing surface of the recording medium in Embodiment 14 of the present invention. Time relationship diagram of optical recording / reproducing clock signal, magnetic recording / reproducing signal clock signal, magnetic reproducing signal, reproducing pulse first data sequence D1, magnetic recording / reproducing signal of PWM, reproducing pulse, and second data sequence in Example 14 Perspective view of an optical recording medium cartridge according to the fourteenth embodiment. Overall block diagram of the recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 14 Time relationship diagram of the recording medium rotation angular velocity ω, optical recording / reproducing clock signal, magnetic recording / reproducing clock signal, magnetic recording signal, and recording wavelength λ of the magnetic recording signal in the fourteenth embodiment. Block diagram of a recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 15 of the present invention (A) is a perspective view when the cartridge is inserted in the fifteenth embodiment. (B) is a perspective view when the cartridge is fixed in the fifteenth embodiment. (C) is a perspective view when the cartridge is discharged in the fifteenth embodiment. (A) is a perspective view when the cartridge is inserted in the fifteenth embodiment. (B) is a perspective view when the cartridge is fixed in the fifteenth embodiment. (C) is a perspective view when the cartridge is discharged in the fifteenth embodiment. (A) is a cross-sectional view when the cartridge is inserted in the fifteenth embodiment. (B) is a cross-sectional view when the cartridge is fixed in the fifteenth embodiment. (C) is a cross-sectional view when the cartridge is discharged in the fifteenth embodiment. Block diagram of recording / reproducing apparatus in embodiment 16 of the present invention (A) is a perspective view when the cartridge is inserted in the sixteenth embodiment. (B) is a perspective view when the cartridge is fixed in the sixteenth embodiment. (C) is a perspective view when the cartridge is discharged in the sixteenth embodiment. (A) is a perspective view when the cartridge is inserted in the sixteenth embodiment. (B) is a perspective view when the cartridge is fixed in the sixteenth embodiment. (C) is a perspective view when the cartridge is discharged in the sixteenth embodiment. (A) is a cross-sectional view when the cartridge is inserted in the sixteenth embodiment. (B) is a cross-sectional view when the cartridge is fixed in the sixteenth embodiment. (C) is a cross-sectional view when the cartridge is discharged in the sixteenth embodiment. (A) is a drawing showing a coating process of a magnetic recording layer on a recording medium in Example 14; (b) is a drawing showing a coating process of a magnetic recording layer on a recording medium in Example 14. (A) is a top view of the recording medium of the fourteenth embodiment. (B) is a top view of the recording medium of the fourteenth embodiment. (C) is a recording medium on which the OCR characters of the fourteenth embodiment are recorded. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the recording medium according to the fourteenth embodiment. (B) is a cross-sectional view of the recording medium according to the fourteenth embodiment. 17 is a block diagram of a key unlocking method according to a seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. Flow chart of a key unlocking program in the seventeenth embodiment Block diagram of key unlocking in embodiment 18 of the present invention Flow chart of key unlocking in Example 18 19 is a block diagram of a personal computer and a CDROM drive according to a nineteenth embodiment of the present invention. A diagram of an optical address table and a magnetic address table of a recording medium in Embodiment 19 Block diagram of a one-drive personal computer CDROM drive according to the nineteenth embodiment. (A) is an address table of an optical file and a magnetic file in the nineteenth embodiment. (B) is an address link table of two files in the nineteenth embodiment. Cross sectional view of the optical recording medium in Example 19 Flow chart of the initial startup of the optical disk in the nineteenth embodiment. (A) A flowchart of a program for correcting a bug in the CDROM software according to the twentieth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. (B) is an address data table of a magnetic file and an optical file in the twentieth embodiment. Block diagram (A) is a flowchart of a bug correction program for CDROM software in the twenty-first embodiment of the present invention. (B) is a diagram of a data correction table in the twenty-first embodiment. (C) is a block diagram of a bug correction unit in the twentieth embodiment. Overall block diagram of computer and disk drive in embodiment 22 of the present invention File structure of computer in Embodiment 22 Flow chart diagram of a virtual file reproducing operation of the computer in Embodiment 22 Flow chart of the virtual file rewriting operation of the computer system in the embodiment 22 Flowchart of the new virtual file creation operation of the computer system in Embodiment 22 (A) is a screen display of the main computer of the computer in the twenty-second embodiment. (B) is a screen display of the main computer of the computer in the twenty-second embodiment. (C) is a screen display of the main computer of the computer in the twenty-second embodiment. FIG. 23D is a screen display diagram of the main computer of the computer according to the twenty-second embodiment. A display screen diagram of a computer in the case of a two-drive system in Embodiment 22 (A) is a screen display diagram of the main computer in the twenty-second embodiment. (B) is a screen display diagram of the main computer in the twenty-second embodiment. (C) is a screen display diagram of the main computer in the twenty-second embodiment. Screen display diagram of main computer in embodiment 22 (A) is a screen display diagram on the sub-computer side with the physical file in the twenty-second embodiment. (B) is a screen display diagram showing the existence of the physical file on the sub-computer side with the physical file in the twenty-second embodiment. Data relation diagram when the main computer and the sub-computer are connected to the network in Embodiment 22 Screen display diagram of main computer in the embodiment 22 A screen display diagram of a computer according to a seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. Information recording layout of recording medium in Example 22 (A) is a perspective view of a magnetic head according to Embodiment 13 of the present invention. (B) is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic head according to Embodiment 13. (c) is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic head according to Embodiment 13. (A) is a perspective view of the magnetic head in the thirteenth embodiment. (B) is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic head in the thirteenth embodiment. (A) is a perspective view of the magnetic head in the thirteenth embodiment. (B) is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic head in the thirteenth embodiment. (A) is a perspective view of the magnetic head in the thirteenth embodiment. (B) is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic head in the thirteenth embodiment. (A) is a perspective view of the noise detection coil in the thirteenth embodiment. (B) is a cross-sectional view of the noise detection coil in the thirteenth embodiment. (A) is a perspective view of the noise detection coil in the thirteenth embodiment. (B) is a block diagram of the noise detection method in the thirteenth embodiment. (A) is a perspective view of the noise detection coil in the thirteenth embodiment. (B) is a block diagram of the noise detection method in the thirteenth embodiment. Frequency distribution diagram of a reproduced signal before noise cancellation and a reproduced signal after noise cancellation in Embodiment 13 Block diagram of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in embodiment 22 of the present invention Block diagram of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in embodiment 23 of the present invention (A) is a top view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 23. (b) is a top view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 23. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 23. (b) is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 23. (c) is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 23. FIG. 14D is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording and reproducing apparatus according to the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. (A) is the data structure of the recording medium in Example 23; (b) is the data structure of the recording medium in Example 23; and (c) is the data structure of the recording medium in Example 23. (A) is a top view of the recording medium in Example 23; (b) is a cross-sectional view of the recording medium in Example 23; (c) is a cross-sectional view of the recording medium in Example 23; A transverse cross-sectional view (e) of the recording medium in Example 23 is a cross-sectional view of the recording medium in Example 23. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 23. (b) is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 23. (c) is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 23. FIG. 14D is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording and reproducing apparatus according to the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 23. (b) is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 23. (c) is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 23. FIG. 14D is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording and reproducing apparatus according to the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 23. (b) is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 23. (c) is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 23. FIG. 14D is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus according to the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 14E is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus according to the twenty-third embodiment. Front view (A) is a cross-sectional view of the recording medium in Example 23, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the recording medium in Example 23, (c) is a cross-sectional view of the recording medium in Example 23, and (d) is the same. The figure of the calculation formula of the track pitch in Example 23 (A) is a block diagram of a magnetic recording and reproducing device in Example 23. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 23. (b) is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 23. (c) is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 23. FIG. 14D is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording and reproducing apparatus according to the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 23. (b) is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 23. (c) is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 23. FIG. 14D is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording and reproducing apparatus according to the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. (A) is a top view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 23. (b) is a top view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 23. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 23. (b) is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 23. (c) is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 23. FIG. 14D is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording and reproducing apparatus according to the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the relationship between the distance from the magnetic head and the strength of the DC magnetic field in the twenty-third embodiment. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 23. (b) is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 23. (c) is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 23. Figure Top view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in embodiment 23 (A) is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic head in Example 23. (b) is a top view of the magnetic head in Example 23. (c) is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic head in Example 23. (d) is the same. Top view of the magnetic head in Example 23 (A) is a top view of the recording medium in Example 23. (b) is an enlarged top view of the recording medium in Example 23. (c) is a cross-sectional view of the recording medium in Example 23. Block diagram of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in embodiment 23 (A) is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 23. (b) is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 23. (c) is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 23. FIG. 23D is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus according to the twenty-third embodiment. 1 is a block diagram of a recording / reproducing apparatus according to a first embodiment of the present invention. (A) is an occurrence frequency distribution diagram of the periods T, 1.5T, and 2T in the first embodiment. (B) is an occurrence frequency distribution diagram of the periods T, 1.5T, and 2T in the first embodiment. Relationship between the maximum length of burst correction and the number of correction symbols in the conventional CD standard FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a fractional distance of data on a medium according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between the data amount of an error correction code and an error rate according to the first embodiment. (A) is an interleave array conversion diagram in the first embodiment. (B) is a diagram showing a data dispersion distance due to interleaving in the first embodiment. Block diagram of a deinterleave unit in the first embodiment (A) is a block diagram of a Reed-Solomon ECC encoder according to the first embodiment. (B) is a block diagram of a Reed-Solomon ECC decoder according to the first embodiment. Flow chart of an error correction program in the first embodiment FIG. 2 is a block diagram of a recording / reproducing apparatus according to the first embodiment. (A) is an interleave array conversion diagram in the first embodiment. (B) is a diagram showing a data dispersion distance due to interleaving in the first embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a time interval and a distance of a code of a subcode of a CD according to the first embodiment. The figure of the magnetic track-optical address correspondence table in the embodiment 14 of the present invention. Block diagram of subcode synchronization signal detection unit and magnetic recording unit in Embodiment 14 Block diagram at the time of magnetic recording of the recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 14 Block diagram at the time of magnetic reproduction of the recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 14 (A) is a time chart of the optical reproduction synchronizing signal in the fourteenth embodiment. (B) is a time chart of the magnetic recording operation ON / OFF in the fourteenth embodiment. (C) is a timing chart of the magnetic recording synchronizing signal in the fourteenth embodiment. The time chart (d) is a time chart of ON / OFF of the optical reproduction operation in the fourteenth embodiment. The time chart (e) is a time chart of the optical reproduction synchronization signal in the fourteenth embodiment. A time chart of operation ON / OFF (g) is a time chart of a magnetic reproduction synchronizing signal in the fourteenth embodiment, and (h) is a time chart of magnetic reproduction data in the fourteenth embodiment. Diagram showing the amount of eccentricity of a disc in the conventional CD standard File structure diagram according to Embodiment 22 of the present invention 13 is a flowchart of a magnetic track access method and a magnetic recording cueing method according to a thirteenth embodiment of the present invention. (A) is a top view of a medium in a cartridge according to Embodiment 23 of the present invention. (B) is a diagram showing the elevation of the magnetic head in Embodiment 23. (c) is a diagram showing elevation of the magnetic head in Embodiment 23 ( FIG. 11D is a diagram showing elevating and lowering of the magnetic head in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 11E is a diagram showing elevating and lowering of the magnetic head in the twenty-third embodiment. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a medium with a media identifier according to the twelfth embodiment of the present invention, and (b) shows a specific physical structure of a media identifier with a magnetic layer recorded in an optical recording unit in the twelfth embodiment. Figure A file configuration diagram when an IC card medium is used in Embodiment 22 of the present invention File configuration diagram when a partial ROM type optical disk is used in Embodiment 22 23 is a perspective view of a recording / reproducing apparatus according to Embodiment 23 of the present invention. Block diagram of recording / reproducing apparatus in embodiment 23 Data structure diagram of video CD of recording / reproducing apparatus in embodiment 23 Flow chart of the recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 23 The figure of the menu screen number / selection number table of the recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 23 (A) is a data format diagram of a conventional video CD, and (b) is a data format diagram of a conventional video CD. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing optical address search information of the recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 23. Data structure diagram of the recording / reproducing device in Embodiment 23 Block diagram of a mastering device in embodiment 17 of the present invention (A) is a time change diagram of the linear velocity at the time of recording in the seventeenth embodiment. (B) is a diagram of an address position at 1.2 m / s on the optical disc in the seventeenth embodiment. Diagram of address position when 1.2m / s → 1.4m / s on optical disc (A) is a physical layout of the address of a regular CD in the seventeenth embodiment. (B) is a physical layout of the address of an illegally copied CD in the seventeenth embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the rotation pulse of the disk and time in the seventeenth embodiment. (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the physical position signal and time in the seventeenth embodiment. (C) is the relationship between address information and time in the seventeenth embodiment. Figure Explanatory drawing of the principle of preventing duplication of a CD in the seventeenth embodiment. Block diagram of recording / reproducing apparatus in embodiment 17 Flow chart of check of illegally copied disk in the seventeenth embodiment (A) is a process diagram of a CD recorded with an ID number in Example 17; (b) is a process diagram of a conventional CD. (A) is a top view of the magnetized machine in Embodiment 17; (b) is a side view of the magnetized machine in Embodiment 17; (c) is an enlarged side view of the magnetized machine in Embodiment 17; Block diagram of a magnetizer in Embodiment 17 Principle diagram of ID number input in Embodiment 17 (A) is a linear velocity-time diagram at the time of constant linear velocity in the seventeenth embodiment. (B) is a linear velocity-time diagram when the linear velocity is changed in the seventeenth embodiment. (C) is a constant linear velocity in the seventeenth embodiment. (D) is a physical layout of addresses when the linear velocity changes in the seventeenth embodiment. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a regular master in the seventeenth embodiment. (B) is a cross-sectional view of a regular molded disk in the seventeenth embodiment. (C) is a cross-sectional view of a fraudulent master in the seventeenth embodiment. d) is a cross-sectional view of the illegally duplicated molded disc in Example 17. Block diagram of CD making machine and recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 17 Flowchart diagram of Embodiment 17 Arrangement diagram of addresses of disk master in Embodiment 17 Block diagram of recording / reproducing apparatus in embodiment 17 (A) is a cross-sectional view of an unauthorized disk in Example 17; (b) is a cross-sectional view of an authorized disk in Example 17; (c) is a waveform diagram of an optical reproduction signal in Example 17; A waveform diagram (e) of a digital signal in the seventeenth embodiment is a waveform diagram of an envelope in the seventeenth embodiment, (f) is a digital waveform diagram in the seventeenth embodiment, and (g) is a waveform diagram of a detection signal in the seventeenth embodiment. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a disk physical arrangement table in the seventeenth embodiment. (A) is an address layout diagram of the optical disc without eccentricity in Embodiment 17; (b) is an address layout diagram of the optical disc with eccentricity in Embodiment 17; (A) is a diagram showing a tracking displacement amount of an authorized disc in the seventeenth embodiment. (B) is a diagram showing a tracking displacement amount of an illegally copied disc in the seventeenth embodiment. (A) shows the address An in the seventeenth embodiment. (B) shows the angle Zn in the seventeenth embodiment. (C) shows the tracking amount Tn in the seventeenth embodiment. (D) shows the same. 17 shows pit depth Dn at 17 FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a laser output, a pit depth, and a reproduced signal in Example 17; FIG. 26 is a diagram showing the effect of preventing duplication for each master disc producing device in the seventeenth embodiment. Block diagram of master forming apparatus in Embodiment 17 Block diagram of master forming apparatus in Embodiment 17 Block diagram of master forming apparatus in Embodiment 17 Block diagram of master forming apparatus in Embodiment 17 Block diagram of master forming apparatus in Embodiment 17 Whole block diagram of a master recording system in Embodiment 17 (A) is a waveform diagram of the laser output in Example 17; (b) is a waveform diagram of the laser output in Example 17; (c) is a cross-sectional view of the substrate in Example 17; A sectional view (e) of the substrate is a sectional view of the molded disk in Example 17. Relationship diagram between laser recording output and reproduction signal in the seventeenth embodiment Process diagram of master making in Example 17 (A) is a top view of a master prepared in Example 17 (b) is a cross-sectional view of a press die of the master in Example 17 Process diagram of master making in Example 17 (A) is a top view of the master made in Example 17 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the master and the press die in Example 17 Process flowchart of master copy creation and recording medium manufacture in Example 17 Flow chart of the disk check method in the seventeenth embodiment FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating a display state of a personal computer screen when a virtual file is used according to a twenty-second embodiment. FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating a display state of a personal computer screen when a virtual file is used according to a twenty-second embodiment. FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating a display state of a personal computer screen when a virtual file is used according to a twenty-second embodiment. Flow chart of opening and displaying a file in the virtual file system in the twenty-second embodiment

Explanation of reference numerals

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Recording / reproducing apparatus 2 Recording medium 3 Magnetic recording layer 4 Optical recording layer 5 Optical transmission layer 6 Optical head 7 Optical recording block 8 Magnetic head 8a Main magnetic pole 8b Sub magnetic pole 8c Head cap 8e Uniform magnetic field area 8m Magnetic field modulation magnetic head 8s For cancellation Magnetic head 9 Magnetic recording block 17 Motor 18 Optical head 19 Head base 23 Head moving actuator 23a Traverse actuator 24a Traverse moving circuit 34 Memory 34a Memory (for system)
Reference Signs List 37 optical recording circuit 37a time axis circuit 37b optical recording section 37c optical output section 37d synthesizing section 38a clock reproducing circuit 40 coil 40a magnetic field modulating coil 40b magnetic recording coil 40c tap 40d tap 40e tap 41 slider 42 disk cassette 43 printing base layer 44 Printing area 45 Printing 46 Pits 47 Substrate 48 Light reflection layer 49 Printing ink 50 Protective layer 51 Arrow 52 Optical recording signal 54 Lens 57 Light emitting unit 60 Adhesive layer 61 Magnetic recording signal 65 Optical track 66 Focus 67 Magnetic track 67a Recording magnetic track 67b Reproduction magnetic track 67s Servo magnetic track 67f Guard band 67g Guard band 67x Cleaning track 69 High μ magnetic layer 70 Head gap 70a Recording head gap 0b Reproduction head gap 81 Interference layer 84 Reflection film 85 Modulation magnetic field 85a Magnetic flux 85b Magnetic flux 150 Connection part 201 Determination step 202 Reproduction step 203 Reproduction transcription step 204 Reproduction only step 205 Recording transcription step 206 Recording step 207 Transcription step 210 Demagnetization area 210a Demagnetization area 210b Degaussing area 301 Shutter 302 Head hole 303 Liner hole 304 Liner 305 Liner support 305a Movable part 305b Secondary liner support 305c Liner elevating part 307 Groove 307a Liner drive groove 310 Liner pin 311 Liner pin guide 312 Pin drive lever 313 Recognition hole 314 Protection pin 315 Liner drive unit 316 Pin shaft 317 Spring 318 Connection unit 319 Pinshaft Center 320 optical address 321a center 321b center 321c center 322 optical data string 323 address 324 data 325 guard band 326 track group 327 block 328 track data 328 synchronization signal 329 address 330 parity 331 data 333 separation circuit 334 modulation circuit 335 disk circuit angle detection section 336 Eccentricity correction amount memory 337 No signal part 338 Traverse control part 339 Optical address magnetic address correspondence table 340 Head amplifier 341 Demodulator 342 Error check part 343 Data separation part 344 AND circuit 345 Recording data 346 No light address area 347 Light address area 348 Magnetic TOC area 349 Track locus 350 Head reproducing section 351 Memory -Data 352 Coating material acupuncture point 353 Coating material transfer roll 354 Intaglio drum 355 Etching part 356 Scriber 357 Soft transfer roll 358 Coating part 360 Magnetic shield 361 Resin part 362 Random magnetic field generator 363 Traverse shock 363b Magnetic head traverse shatter 364 Position reference part 365 Disk lock section 366 Traverse connecting section 367 Traverse gear 367c Magnetic head traverse gear 368 Lookup table 369 Synchronizing section 370 Recording format 371 Track number section 372 Data section 373 CRC section 374 Gap section 375 Connecting section guide section 376 Disk cleaning section 377 Magnetic head Cleaning part 378 Noise canceller 380 Disc cleaning part connection 381 Magnetic sensor 382 Optical reproduction clock signal 383 Magnetic clock signal 384 Magnetic recording signal 385 Discrimination window time 386 Optical sensor 387 Optical mark 387a Bar code 388 Light transmitting section 389 Upper cover 390 Cassette cover 391 Magnetic surface shutter 392 Shutter connection portion 393 Cassette Pig rotating shaft 394 Cassette insertion slot 395 Tape 396 Label section 397 Buzzer 398 Magnetic recording area 399 Screen printer 400 Barcode printer 401 High Hc section 402 Magnetic section 402a Space section 403 Magnetic section 404 Key management table 405 Step 406 in flowchart Release decoder 407 Audio decompression block 408 Personal computer 409 Hard disk 410 Installation step 411 application 412 OS
413 BIOS
414 drive 415 interface 416 flowchart steps 421 optical file 422 magnetic file 436 network BIOS
437 LAN Network 447 Flowchart Step 447a Flowchart Step 448 Corrected Data 449 Display 450 Keypad 451 Error Correction Step 452 Parity 453 C1 Parity 454 C2 Parity 455 Index
456 Subcode synchronization detector 457 Index detector 458 Frequency divider 459 Magnetic synchronization signal detector 460 Shortest / longest pulse detector 461 Pseudo optical synchronization signal generator 462 Pseudo magnetic synchronization signal generator 463 Optical synchronization signal detector 464 / Multiplier 465 Changeover switch 466 Waveform shaping unit 467 Clock reproducing unit 468 Media identifier 469 Optical address information 470 Data 514 Spring 514a Head lifting / lowering coupling unit 514b Head lifting / lowering inhibiting unit 514c Optical head traveling area 516 Loading motor 517 Loading gear 518 Tray moving gear 519 Head elevator 520 Tray 521 Upper / lower opening / closing axis 522 Menu screen / selection number table 523 Playback control information 524 Flow chart Step 525 list ID offset table 526 optical search information 527 magnetic preparative latch search information 528 master data 529 mastering device 530 data arrangement 531 Zone
532 Physical arrangement table 533 Unauthorized disk check circuit 534 Encryption decoder 535 Verification circuit 536 Output / operation stop means 537 Encryption encoder 538 Encryption signal 539 Physical position 540 Magnetizer 541 Magnetization section 542 Magnetization pole 543 Magnetization current generator 544 Current switching 545a Coil 546 ID number generator 547 Mixer 548 Separation key 549 Separator 550 ID number 551 Steps in flowchart 552 Physical arrangement signal 553 Angular position detector 554 Tracking amount detector 555 Pit depth detector 556 Measurement disk physical arrangement table 557 Disk center 558 Disk rotation center 559 Eccentric part 560 Pit 561 Duplicate pit 562 Pulse signal 563 Duplication prevention signal 564 Tracking modulation signal Raw part 565 Copy protection signal generation part 566 Light output modulation signal generation part 567 Light output modulation part 568 Pulse width modulation part 569 Pulse width adjustment part 570 Output address information part 571 Time axis change part 572 Master 573 Photosensitive layer 574 Photosensitive part 575 Metal Master disc 576 Molded disc 577 Second photosensitive section 578 Communication interface section 579 External encryption decoder 580 Pit group 581 Reproduced waveform 582 Random extractor 583 Random number generator 565 Screen 566 Step (step virtual file flowchart)
567 window 568 folder 569 file 570 CD-ROM icon 571 CD-ROM-RAM icon 572 HDD
573 Invisible file
574 Invisible Folder
575 display 576 actual capacity display 577 virtual capacity display 578 password input section 579 file name input section

Claims (3)

The sub-information is recorded on a specific track by wobbling, and the recording medium on which the main information is encrypted is reproduced by using an optical head to obtain the above-mentioned encryption, and the vertical direction of tracking is obtained. A reproducing device that obtains the sub-information by a detection unit that detects a displacement of a position, performs a specific process using the sub-information, and then decrypts the cipher. 2. The reproducing apparatus according to claim 1, wherein, in the specific processing, the specific processing is performed using the equivalence information obtained by decrypting the sub-encryption encrypted and recorded on the recording medium and the sub-information. 3. The reproducing apparatus according to claim 2, wherein the sub-cipher is encrypted with a one-way function.

Images